artresearch.com.au

The Scheding Index of Australian Art & Artists

Search or browse the Index to locate biographical information
on Australian artists more details»


Showing 158,397 records of 158,397 total. We are displaying one thousand.

First | Previous | Record 107,051 – 108,050 of 158,397 | Next | Last

McDiarmid Davidview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
de Medici eXview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Fiveash Tinaview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Bennett Jamesview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Apwerl Lenaview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Goldie Geoffreyview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
de Clario Domenicoview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Gerber Matthysview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Day Claireview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Wilson Caroleview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Power Anne Marieview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Boonma Montienview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Vidins Editeview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Gascoigne Rosalieview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
MacPherson Roberview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Moffatt Traceyview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Barker Michele and Anna Munsterview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Munster Anna with Barker Micheleview full entry
Reference: see Cross-Currents in Contemporary Australian Art by Traudi Allen. Some biographical information on the artists included is to be found in the text which discusses their work. With notes, list of plates and index.
Covers work from the 1940s to the late 1990s, identifying intersecting aims and ideas.
Full contents • Introduction. Art comes out: tracing the development of contemporary art
• 1. A Continuing romance: the biography of the tree
• 2. Managing modernism: Australian artistic movements since 1940
• 3. A Female space: Australian women's art
• 4. Take away or eat here? Decisions on the digestion of Asian images
• 5. Picturing life together: the community and the visual arts
• 6. Racial and sexual versions: the art of minority cultures
• 7. Portraits in prayer: Eastern philosophies in Australian art
• Conclusion. Everything is cool again: the contemporary context.
 
Notes Includes index.
Bibliography: p. 169-174.
Publishing details: Craftsman House, 2001, 184 p. : ill. (some col.) Hardcover, dw. Ex library copy
Colonization, wilderness, and spaces betweenview full entry
Reference: Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Pease Christopher and Alan Michelson essay on by Elizabeth Hutchinsonview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Michelson Alan and Pease Christopher essay on by Elizabeth Hutchinsonview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
colonial artview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Streeton Arthurview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Streeton Arthurview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Robeets Tomview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Roberts Tomview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Conder Charles view full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Sutherland Janeview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Dale Robert Lieutview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
McCubbin Frederickview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Impressionismview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Glover Johnview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
von Guerard Eugeneview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Earle Augustus in passingview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Abrahams Louis in passingview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
Aboriginal Artview full entry
Reference: see Colonization, wilderness, and spaces between : nineteenth-century landscape painting in Australia and the United States / editors Richard Read, Kenneth Haltman. Includes bibliographical references and index. "This publication arose from an inspired partnership between the Terra Foundation, The University of Western Australia, the Art Gallery of Western Australia, and the University of Melbourne's Ian Potter Museum of Art. Together, the partners co-organized and presented the Terra Collection Initiative exhibition 'Continental shift: Nineteenth Century American and Australian Landscape Painting' (shown in Melbourne as 'Not as the Songs of Other Lands: 19th Century American and Australian Landscape Painting') -- Page 7.
Publishing details: [Chicago] : Terra Foundation for American Art ; [Perth, W.A.] : School of Design, University of Western Australia, 2020, Chicago : Distributed by the University of Chicago Press 
195 pages : illustrations (chiefly color)
watercoloursview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Amor Rickview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Archer Suzanneview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Armstrong Coralieview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Austin Grahamview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Baird Rodview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Bendit Margaretview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Blundell Janeview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Borrack Janeview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Bryce Grahamview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Caldwell Johnview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Candy Robview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Carroll Patrickview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Carver Malcolmview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Castagnet Alvaroview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Chalk Juttaview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Chapman Ianview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Charker Beverleyview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Clarke Denisview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Dunlop Sophieview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Gentle Christopherview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Goldsmith Helenview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Grant Ianview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Harding Nicholasview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Heinrich Berndview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Hendy Sandraview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Hondow Alanview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Howlett Leonoraview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Huang Chen-Lungview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Hyatt Amandaview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Ivanyi Belaview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Kubbos Evaview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Krause Elizabethview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Largent Georgeview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Laverty Peterview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Lemon Josifaview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Leveson Sandraview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Lovett Robertview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Marchant Grahamview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Maughan Jocelynview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Mayo Robynview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
McCann Lucyview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
McKenzie Paulview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Miller Paulview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Mortimer Elaineview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Murphy Rogerview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Norling Robinview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Opiat--Prinsloo Desireeview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Paskett Davidview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Pata Danielview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Pekel Hermanview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Paterson Rossview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Pennefather Judyview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Pinson Peterview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Porter Christineview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Rees Lindaview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Salminen Johnview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Salnajs Venitaview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Sharpe Wendyview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Sheridan Susanview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Smeeth Peterview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Stannard Ronview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Storrier Timview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Stratton Brianview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Symonds Beverlyview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Taylor Davidview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Taylor Neilview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Thompson Owenview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Troughton Guyview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
van Dyke Ingridview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
van Nunen Davidview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Wade Robert Aview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Warren Guyview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Wolseley Johnview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Woodland Johnview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Zbukvic Josephview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Xinqun Fengview full entry
Reference: see Brushes with History : Masters of Watercolour by Linda and David van Nunen. Includes artists’ biographies and bibliographies. [’The world's oldest painting medium, watercolour has remained a significant source of inspiration and expression for many artists, as it was for J.M.W. Turner, Thomas Girtin, Alexander Cozens, John Constable, Eugene Delacroix, Paul Cezanne and Picasso, among other luminaries in the history of art. The freshness of a diluted pigment diffused over a responsive paper can create magnificent myriad effects of luminosity and translucence not possible in any other medium.
'Brushes with History: Masters of Watercolour Ninety Years of the Australian Watercolour Institute', by Linda van Nunen and David van Nunen, with a foreword by Dr. Michael Brand, Director, Art Gallery of New South Wales, is a lavishly illustrated, deluxe edition produced by Australia's premier art publisher, in celebration of the 90th anniversary of the Australian Watercolour Institute, the country's first and foremost national society of professional watercolourists.
Throughout its history, the AWI has promoted the practice of watercolour through national and international exhibitions of the finest paintings produced in the medium, numbering among its members and exhibitors many of Australia's celebrated artists -- from Arthur Streeton, Hans Heysen, Rupert Bunny, Blamire Young, Margaret Preston and Thea Proctor to some of the most important contemporary painters working today in Australia, England, Scotland, China and America.
This 220-page publication both chronicles the history of Australia's pre-eminent watercolour society and surveys the diversity of techniques, styles and subject matter in the evolution of watercolour over the past nine decades.
Linda and David van Nunen have produced not just a volume of the work of current members but have documented in depth the activities of artists who have been major figures both in the history of the Australian Watercolour Institute and this country’s visual arts culture. It is through their efforts that the achievements of these past members will now not be forgotten. It is a must-have book for anyone with an interest in watercolour.’] [to be indexed] *

Publishing details: Australian Watercolour Institute, 2015,
Hardback – 220 pages, colour illustrations, colour portraits.
Xinqun Fengview full entry
Reference: various publications by Jiangxi Fine Arts Publishing 1991-2011
Watercolour Society of W.A. newsletter
view full entry
Reference: Watercolour Society of W.A. newsletter. In 2015, issuing body became also known as WatercoloursWA. [to be indexed]
.
Publishing details: Print version began with: No. 253 (August 2005), bimonthly.
Ref: 1000
WatercoloursWAview full entry
Reference: see Watercolour Society of W.A. newsletter. In 2015, issuing body became also known as WatercoloursWA.
.
Publishing details: Print version began with: No. 253 (August 2005), bimonthly.
South Australian artview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Art gallery of South Australiaview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Bowden Annie Maud essay and 21 worksview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Beckett Clarice essayview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Heysen Hans extensive referencesview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Holman George Antiques Adelaideview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Rees Lloydview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Withers Walterview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Gruner Eliothview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Colquhoun Alexanderview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Trenerry Horaceview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Bunny Rupertview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Davidson Bessieview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
von Guerard Eugene Lake Corangamite 1857view full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Heysen Noraview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Oatley James clockmakerview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Johnstone J H Evening Shadows view full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Tanneet Louis Evening Shadows after H J Johnstone and An Aboriginal Queenview full entry
Reference: A Shared Vision: The Hunter Collection. [Collection of benefactors Tom & Elizabeth Hunter]. Includes essays (including The Hunter Family: Reflections on Australuian Art by Tracey Lock; and Annie Maud Bowden and the South Australian Arts and Crafts Movement, by Rebecca Evans; and the Hunter Clarice Beckett Collection by Tracey Lock), list of works of art, notes, index. [’The purpose of this book is to catalogue and describe the items of incontrovertible artistic merit and beauty which have been contributed by one family for the pleasure and education of the people living in and visiting the state of South Australia. The publication contains a diversity of works by great Australian artists, as well as by skilled artisans in England and Asia, and is a recognition of the irrefutable talents and creativity of humanity that form a lasting bridge to the past, to be preserved and admired, to uplift and provide comfort, to inform and be treasured.’]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of South Australia, 2021, 311pp, hc.
Masterpieces of Australian Bird view full entry
Reference: Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Ref: 1000
Ramsay J S Pview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Littlejohns R Tview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Webb Othoview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Jerrard C H Hview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Sharland Michaelview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Gaukrodger D Wview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Hindwood Keithview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Dickison Dudley Jview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Fien Ivanview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Pizzey Grahamview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Goddard Mervynview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Male Nevilleview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Warham Johnview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Chaffer Normanview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Lindgren Ericview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Purnell Jackview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Morcombe Michaelview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Breedon Stanleyview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Garstone Rayview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Robinson Lenview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Webster Cyrilview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Richards Keith and Berylview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Channells Raymondview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Gardner Tom and Pamview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Wells A Gview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Chapman Graemeview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Parish Steveview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Baghel Hohnview full entry
Reference: see Masterpieces of Australian Bird Photography, by Peter Slater. Each photograph is accompanied by a brief text, often including comments by the photographer on the philosophy behind his work.
Publishing details: Rigby 1980, hc, dw, Illustrated with Colour and Black & White Photographs. 191 pages
Hall Maryview full entry
Reference: in Art Gallery of South Australia, plate with seascape scene, c1875-85, bone china
Seton Alex b1977view full entry
Reference: in Art Gallery of South Australia, ‘My concerns will outlive yours’, marble
Canberra artview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Griffin Marion Mahony archive, essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Cook Captain journal, etc, essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Raper George essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Hunter John sketchbook, essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
proclamation Governor Arthurview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Arthur Governor proclamationview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Governor Arthur’s proclamationview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Earle Augustus essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Bligh William notebook, essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Dodd Robert and Bligh William notebook, essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Bayer Johannes 1603view full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Donker Hendrick 1659view full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Roberts Tom Bourke Street 1885 essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Mabo Eddie essay with drawingview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Olsen John diary and Five Bells essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Pollock Jackson Blue Poles essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Brancusi Birds in Space essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Yirawala bark paintings essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Aboriginal Memorial in NGA essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Nolan Sidney Ned Kelly essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Boyd Arthur paintings in the studio, essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
McCahon Colin Victory over Death 2, essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Macdonald A E Early Canberra 1913 brief essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Gruner Elioth landscape brief essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Gascoigne Rosalie brief essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Tillers Imants brief essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Holland Steven photographs brief essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Nolan Sidney Burke and Wills essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Nolan Sidney Death of Captain Fraser essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Nolan Sidney Riverbend essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Maymuru Banapana essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Webber John portrait of Cook essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Omai portrait, essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Lempriere Thomas portrait of Captain Kingshorne, essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Brack John, essay including self portraitview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Arkley Howard portrait of Nick Cave essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Xian Ah essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Yirrkala artists essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Roberts Tom Opening of Parliament essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Hurley Frank essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Oscar - Aboriginal child artist c1890 essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Nolan Sid Gallipoli essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Gilbert Charles Webster diorama essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
McCubbin Louis diorama essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Chalker Jack war paintings essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Hele Ivor war paintings essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Parer Damien essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Bowen Stella Bomber Crew essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Dobell William Billy Boy essayview full entry
Reference: see Treasures of Canberra By Betty Churcher and Lucy Quinn. Includes bibliographical references (page 200-202) and index. [‘The best thing about Canberra is Australia's greatest collections of art, documents and artefacts’.]
Publishing details: Halstead Press, hc, 208pp, colour illustrations, facsimiles, portraits, photographs
Gill Frank decoratorview full entry
Reference: see Bendigo Pottery by Paul A. Scholes. With list of Bendigo pottery company names, glossary of terms, bibliography, index.
[’This is the history of the oldest pottery still working in Australia. It is lavishly illustrated with colour and black and white plates. It contains many listings and descriptions of the various product manufactured down through the years. Contains drawings of stamps, pottery layout, and kiln construction.’] [’George Duncan Guthrie set up the Bendigo Potteries in 1858 and this book traces its fortunes as well as its production methods; its product range (everything except bone china); its stamps; its craftsmen's initials; the letterpress book; ginger ale bottles; Guthrie's and Paynter's glaze recipes.’]
Publishing details: Lowden Publishing Co., 1979, Hardback, dw, 281pages.
Tresize Trevor decoratorview full entry
Reference: see Bendigo Pottery by Paul A. Scholes. With list of Bendigo pottery company names, glossary of terms, bibliography, index.
[’This is the history of the oldest pottery still working in Australia. It is lavishly illustrated with colour and black and white plates. It contains many listings and descriptions of the various product manufactured down through the years. Contains drawings of stamps, pottery layout, and kiln construction.’] [’George Duncan Guthrie set up the Bendigo Potteries in 1858 and this book traces its fortunes as well as its production methods; its product range (everything except bone china); its stamps; its craftsmen's initials; the letterpress book; ginger ale bottles; Guthrie's and Paynter's glaze recipes.’]
Publishing details: Lowden Publishing Co., 1979, Hardback, dw, 281pages.
Metcalf Tom decoratorview full entry
Reference: see Bendigo Pottery by Paul A. Scholes. With list of Bendigo pottery company names, glossary of terms, bibliography, index.
[’This is the history of the oldest pottery still working in Australia. It is lavishly illustrated with colour and black and white plates. It contains many listings and descriptions of the various product manufactured down through the years. Contains drawings of stamps, pottery layout, and kiln construction.’] [’George Duncan Guthrie set up the Bendigo Potteries in 1858 and this book traces its fortunes as well as its production methods; its product range (everything except bone china); its stamps; its craftsmen's initials; the letterpress book; ginger ale bottles; Guthrie's and Paynter's glaze recipes.’]
Publishing details: Lowden Publishing Co., 1979, Hardback, dw, 281pages.
Hicks Tom decoratorview full entry
Reference: see Bendigo Pottery by Paul A. Scholes. With list of Bendigo pottery company names, glossary of terms, bibliography, index.
[’This is the history of the oldest pottery still working in Australia. It is lavishly illustrated with colour and black and white plates. It contains many listings and descriptions of the various product manufactured down through the years. Contains drawings of stamps, pottery layout, and kiln construction.’] [’George Duncan Guthrie set up the Bendigo Potteries in 1858 and this book traces its fortunes as well as its production methods; its product range (everything except bone china); its stamps; its craftsmen's initials; the letterpress book; ginger ale bottles; Guthrie's and Paynter's glaze recipes.’]
Publishing details: Lowden Publishing Co., 1979, Hardback, dw, 281pages.
Blandford Wally decoratorview full entry
Reference: see Bendigo Pottery by Paul A. Scholes. With list of Bendigo pottery company names, glossary of terms, bibliography, index.
[’This is the history of the oldest pottery still working in Australia. It is lavishly illustrated with colour and black and white plates. It contains many listings and descriptions of the various product manufactured down through the years. Contains drawings of stamps, pottery layout, and kiln construction.’] [’George Duncan Guthrie set up the Bendigo Potteries in 1858 and this book traces its fortunes as well as its production methods; its product range (everything except bone china); its stamps; its craftsmen's initials; the letterpress book; ginger ale bottles; Guthrie's and Paynter's glaze recipes.’]
Publishing details: Lowden Publishing Co., 1979, Hardback, dw, 281pages.
Beckett Clariceview full entry
Reference: see Clarice Beckett: Australian artist's place in global art history cemented in exhibition
ABC Arts / By Hannah Reich for The Art Show
Publishing details: https://www.abc.net.au/news/2021-04-25/clarice-beckett-australian-art-history/100083566
Panel by panelview full entry
Reference: Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills. [To be indexed fully].
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Joliffe Eric essay onview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills.

‘Because his drawings show such an affinity for the bush and outback, many people are surprised to learn that Jolliffe came from England. Eric Ernest Jolliffe was born at Portsmouth in January 1907 and came to Perth with his family in 1914. The family moved to Sydney after six months where Jolliffe, because of what he calls his ‘rebel streak’ was always in trouble with his teachers. By the time he was 15 he was delighted to be able to escape to the bush where he spent the next six years working as a boundary rider, rabbit trapper, and in shearing sheds. When he returned to Sydney to visit his family a chance visit to Angus and Robertson started him on his artistic career. Discovering a book on drawing he ‘learned to my surprise that art wasn’t necessarily a gift divine, but a craft that could be studied and worked at’. He enrolled for an introductory course at East Sydney Technical College where his teachers were almost unanimous and outspokenly frank about his lack of talent! But Jolliffe was determined to prove his critics wrong and continued with his drawings. During the Depression he obtained a job as a window cleaner at a building opposite The Bulletin. This allowed him to inundate that magazine with cartoons and be close at hand to retrieve the inevitable rejections over the next few years. Jolliffe’s approach was a new one for a cartoonist. He showed the hard reality of the bush as it really was and The Bulletin could not understand his harsh, realistic approach. Eventually, they began to buy his cartoons and by the outbreak of World War II he had become a regular contributor and took over the Andy cartoon feature from Arthur Homer. It was during the war, when he served as a camouflage officer with the RAAF, that he first met the tribal Aborigines of Arnhem Land and along the West Australian coast:

   ‘It was love at first sight. As a bushman I could appreciate their deep love and understanding of their country. Their capacity to live off the harsh land and their complex social and cultural life never failed to absorb me.’

   Jolliffe joined Smith’s Weekly after the war but again he found that the management was not in sympathy with his approach to the Aborigines and the outback. He resigned and, as a freelance, sold Saltbush Bill and Witchetty’s Tribe to Pix Magazine where they settled in for a long run. By the early ’seventies, books reprinting these characters had sold more than 6 million copies. In 1973, Jolliffe began publication of his own magazine, Jolliffe’s Outback, which contained both Saltbush and Witchetty, portraits and sketches from the outback, Jolliffe’s own humorous accounts of country life, and reprints of Sandy Blight - a comic strip which had run in the Sun-Herald for almost two decades.

  Playtime only lasted until 24 September 1947 when the Sydney Morning Herald announced that, as a means of preserving dollars, all of the newspapers had agreed to cut their imports of Canadian newsprint by 25 percent. As the Herald wanted to keep ‘its important news service at the highest level’ the comic section was suspended, leaving a small Aborigine boy in Tom Flynn facing a crocodile, hurling itself at him with jaws agape! But Tom Flynn and a number of other comics from the Playtime section were to be revived with the arrival of the Sunday Herald.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Nicholls Sydview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills.
‘Sydney Wentworth Nicholls was born at Frederick Henry Bay, Tasmania in 1896 with the surname of Jordan. He adopted his stepfather’s name when his mother remarried in 1907. Nicholls attended a wide variety of schools in NSW and New Zealand before taking his first job with the printing firm of W. E. Smith in 1910. At the same time he began seven years study under Norman Carter and Dattilo Rubbo at the Royal Art Society. His first published work appeared in the International Socialist when he was 16 and by the time he was 18 he was having cartoons accepted by The Bulletin.

  Politically committed, Nicholls contributed cartoons to Direct Action, the organ for the International Workers of the World. In 1914, one of these cartoons (‘Long Live The War! Hip, Hip, ’Ooray! Fill ’Em up Again!’) was instrumental in the paper’s editor, Tom Barker, being sentenced to 12 months in jail for publishing material prejudicial to recruitment. Understandably, the young artist experienced problems in selling his cartoons to the establishment press and drifted into designing art titles and posters for motion pictures. Over the next five years he was responsible for the titles and poster for The Sentimental Bloke, the various films of ‘Snowy’ Baker, and in 1920 visited the US to study art-title designs for motion pictures.

  He joined the Evening News as senior artist where the managing editor, Errol Knox, asked him to produce a strip to compete with Us Fellers. During his time at the News, Nicholls employed and encouraged Aub Aria and was responsible for the publication of May Gibbs’ Bib and Bub.

Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Dunstab Zifview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
McCrae Hughview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Gibbs Mayview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills.
‘Cecilia May Gibbs was born in Surrey, England in 1876. She came to Australia aboard the Hesperus in 1881 and her family eventually settled near Harvey, Western Australia. Gibbs began drawing as a small child and was advised and encouraged by her father who was a gifted amateur artist. She soon developed her love for the Australian bush and its animals and often invented stories about them to entertain younger children. After completing her education she went to London around 1896 with her mother - the first of many such trips. Gibbs spent eight years studying at the Cope and Nichol School, Chelsea Polytechnic and the Henry Blackburn School of Black and White Art. The poverty, cruelty and richness of London made a deep impression on her causing her to write and illustrate her first book, About Us, which was published in Bavaria in 1912.

  When she returned to Australia she settled in Sydney and by 1914 was earning money doing quick sketches of soldiers departing for World War I. In 1916 Angus and Robertson published her best-known book, Gumnut Babies. This was followed by Gum Blossom Babies (1916), Snugglepot and Cuddlepie (1918), Little Ragged Blossom (1920), Little Obelia (1921), and a host of others over the years.

  From 1926 until 1931, Gibbs had the unique distinction of having two comics running at the same time, in opposition papers, when she drew Tiggy Touchwood for the Sunday Sun under the signature ‘Sam Cottman’. Her clean, crisp line drawings and soft watercolours were accurate and instructive and she never lost sight of the fact that she was drawing for the very young. While her artwork and themes generally tended to be charming and gentle, the lingering impressions of her London visits made her quite capable of producing some rather frightening characters and situations like those involving The Banksia Men.

  When she died in November 1969, May Gibbs had no children of her own but she had won the love of generations of children with her books, illustrations and comics. She was awarded an MBE for her services to children’s literature and left her estate to UNICEF, The Spastic Centre and Crippled Children.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Carrington Thomas 1870sview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lindsay Normanview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hopkins Livingstonview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Coles T Eview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Rodd Nelleview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Cross Stan essay p18 and many referencesview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Sass Alekview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hartt Cecilview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hallett Charlieview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Russell Jim - James Newtonview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills.
‘James Newton Russell was born at Campsie, NSW in 1909, the son of a council plumber who was killed in an accident in 1915. After leaving Lewisham Christian Brothers in 1924 he became a copy boy on the Sydney Daily Guardian and soon transferred to Smith’s Weekly. Because his drawing ability had not reached the standard required, Russell drifted into a series of jobs including that of office boy at Sydney Stadium, where he also became a preliminary boxer for a brief period. During this time he improved his drawing and sketches he made of notable boxers were published in various Sydney papers. In 1926, the head artist of Fox Films offered to tutor Russell in the basics of art if he paid £100 and worked for two years without pay. Russell accepted and by the time he left Fox Films he had become a capable artist.

   He joined the Sydney Evening News in 1928 and was the youngest political cartoonist in the country. When the paper folded in 1931 he became a sports caricaturist with the Referee then transferred back to Smith’s. For almost two decades he handled single-block cartoons, strips, and film reviews. When Stan Cross left, Russell took over You & Me, altering the title to Mr & Mrs Potts, as well as becoming Art Editor and drawing Smith’s Vaudevillians. Through the war years Russell was also responsible for two satirical strips, Adolf, Herman and Musso and Schmit der Sphy, which were rumoured to have put Russell on the blacklist, if the Allies had lost the war.

   As well as being a cartoonist, Jim Russell is a writer, radio and TV personality, publisher of dancing and music magazines, and finds time to run two travel agencies. He retired from the Herald and Weekly Times staff in 1976 but continues to draw The Potts under agreement.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Souter D H biography p20view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Shaw Rview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bancks James Charles biography p23 Ginger Meggsview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills.
‘Born at Enmore, NSW in 1889, James Charles Bancks was the son of an Irish railway worker. On leaving school at the age of 14, Bancks took a position as a clerk/office-boy/lift driver with a finance company but found the work sheer drudgery. Deciding to become an artist, Bancks eventually had some of his work accepted by The Comic Australian in 1913. When further work was accepted by The Arrow in 1914 he was encouraged to submit work to The Bulletin which not only accepted it but offered him a position as an artist at £8 per week.

Bancks accepted the job immediately and remained primarily with The Bulletin until 1922. Throughout this period he was studying art under Dattilo Rubbo and Julian Ashton and supplying freelance cartoons to the Sunday Sun. Aware that the Sunbeams comic section was imminent the editor, Monty Grover, suggested that Bancks draw a strip and that it should relate the adventures of Gladsome Gladys. Bancks followed the editor’s suggestion but, fortunately, beguiling little girls of irresistible charm were not Bancks’ cup of tea.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Miller Syd view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills.
‘With the end of the war in sight, the Herald and Weekly Times enticed Syd Miller to discard the Chesty Bond strip and create new material for them. His first effort, Sandra, appeared in the Melbourne Herald in July 1945 as well as other Australian papers, and also appeared in England. Soon, Miller found that featuring a heroine limited him in the type of stories he wanted to present and with the blessing of his management began forging another strip. Sandra finished in November 1946 and was immediately followed by Rod Craig. Again, the strip was syndicated in various Australian states as well as Jamaica, Paris and Buenos Aires. It also became the first local adventure strip to be adapted as a radio serial.

  Sydney Leon Miller was born in Strathfield, NSW in 1901, the son of a newsagent. When he left Fort Street High School in 1916 he worked briefly at an importers before being given the position as a trial apprentice in the process engraving department of The Bulletin. Being surrounded by the best black and white artists of the day inspired Miller to further his interest in art by attending classes at the Royal Art Society. In 1917 he joined Harry Julius who had returned from the US to start Filmads to produce the first animated cartoons made commercially in Australia. He freelanced selling cartoons to The Bulletin, Aussie and in 1920, Smith’s Weekly. Later that year, he was given a contract with Smith’s to draw political, sports and general cartoons as well as writing and illustrating film and stage critiques.

  During the 1930s Miller ran weekly panel features, Curiosities, in the Melbourne Herald, and Nature Notes in the Daily Telegraph. In 1938 he created Red Gregory for Smith’s and the same year collaborated with Ted Maloney of the J. Walter Thompson agency to create Chesty Bond. Miller handled the advertising strip until he joined the Herald and- Weekly Times and the strip passed to another artist. During a wartime sequence of Chesty Bond the inclusion of Bob Hope brought the threat of a £.100 000 damage suit which was finally averted.

  From 1942 to 1945, Miller published many comic books and encouraged many young cartoonists. Starting in 1948 his single column spot, Animalaughs, appeared throughout Australia as well as England, Scotland and South Africa. It was unprecedented for an Australian artist to have two strips being syndicated overseas at the same time.

  In 1955 Miller commenced a new daily strip. Us Girls, which ran until 1957 when he resigned to enter a partnership in the production of TV animation and sound-slide films. He remained in this field until retiring to his copperwork and painting. Not only was Miller a prolific and versatile artist but he is arguably one of the finest and most under-rated this country has produced... Another early publisher into the field was Syd Miller. In 1940 he gathered together experienced writers and cartoonists and started publishing one-shot titles (e.g. Zip-Action, Sizzling). While contributing odd pages of reprints of Fatty Finn, Nicholls took the opportunity to introduce his new character, The Phantom Piratex which allowed Nicholls to pursue his love of the sea, sailing ships, and lusty pirate adventures. Eric Jolliffe drew Trent of the Territory, a forerunner of his Tom Flynn strip; Syd Miller handled Red Grainger; Les Such drew a science fiction tale, Sting Lasky and the Fish People', and Stan Clements drew Tom Dunne - Scientific Detective and Jim and Jill in Giantland, the latter being aimed at very young readers. In terms of the ability of the people concerned, these comics represented some of the best of the war years. Unfortunately, very few issues were published due to the artists being committed in other areas and the constant battle for a non-established publisher to obtain supplies of precious newsprint.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Weston Harry Jview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lindsay Percy view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Fisher Oliveview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Driffield Lance view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Agnew Garnet view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Reynolds Len view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Julius Harry view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Feldwick Muriel view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Waring Jack view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Little George view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Jonsson Joe view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Vickery Ruth view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Gurney Alex view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illstrations. ‘Late in 1940, Alex Gurney began developing his legendary soldier strip, Bluey and Curley. In November 1940 it began appearing in Picture News, a short-lived magazine published by the Herald and Weekly Times. Initially a full-page strip, Gurney saw Bluey as the hard-headed World War I veteran involved with the exuberant new recruit, Curly. Again, the theme tended to revolve around camp activities rather than fighting. When Picture News folded the comic was picked-up by the Sun-News Pictorial who introduced the comic by running a full page of five strips on 1 February 1941.

  Unlike Cross’ strip, Bluey and Curley reflected the popularly held image of the digger as a fighting man without peer but more interested in his beer and gambling; resenting all authority; a confidence man with the ability to laugh at himself; and a ready disciple of the ‘you can’t win’ attitude. More than any other strip, Bluey and Curley gave civilians an insight into the hardships of Army life, the slang expressions of the period, and projected the mood of envy directed towards the more highly paid US soldiers. But all subjects were handled in a gentle, smile-provoking manner -for, while Gurney was not particularly subtle, he was never cruel. His handling of ‘fuzzie-wuzzies’ or ‘boongs’ and their pidgin-English were classics.

  With his protruding nose, long jaw, straight red hair and with a cigarette from his bottom lip, Bluey was usually a foil for his more gregarious mate. Curley, with his baby-face and curly blonde hair was the ladies’ man of the duo, with a girl in every town. The dialogue was pure Australian only lacking the actual swear words to make it fully authentic.

  Alexander George Gurney was born at Portsmouth in 1902. His father died when Gurney was five months old and his mother, who was Australian, brought the boy back to Hobart. Gurney completed his education at Macquarie Street State School at the age of 13 and worked for a short period as an ironmonger. He then served a seven-year apprenticeship as an electrician and during that period commenced art training, attending the high classes at Hobart Technical School. Gradually, he began selling cartoons to the Tasmanian Mail, The Bulletin, Smith’s Weekly and Melbourne Punch.

  Gurney published a book of caricatures of notable citizens, Tasmanians Today, in 1926 and the work brought him to the attention of mainland newspapers. He took a position with the Melbourne Morning Post and when this paper was incorporated in the Sun-News Pictorial late in 1927 he moved to Sydney to freelance. As well as contributing to The Bulletin he created the Stiffy & Mo comic for Beckett’s Budget. During 1928-9 he worked for the Sunday Times and in 1931 he joined, first, The Guardian and then the short-lived Labor paper, The World. When this paper folded in 1932 he went to the Adelaide News and in 1933, finally, found a permanent position as a sporting cartoonist with the Melbourne Herald.

  In 1933 Gurney drew the Ben Bowyang strip for a while before taking Sam Wells’ place as the leader page cartoonist when Wells went to England. On Wells’ return, Gurney set about creating Bluey and Curley. To get an authentic view of army life and humour, Gurney visited many army camps all over Australia and, in 1944, took his sketchbook to Lae, Port Moresby, Ramu Valley and other points in New Guinea where Australian troops were fighting. As a result of this visit, he came down with a bout of malaria in August 1944. The Sun-News Pictorial rationed his strips, running Bluey and Curley on a three-days-a-week basis until he came out of hospital.

  Gurney’s outstanding sense of humour was backed-up by detailed panels containing a great variety of angles and well-balanced figures. Acknowledged as one of Australia’s finest cartoonists, his particular strength was his ability to capture the flavour of the Australian character as seen through the eyes of Australians. Gurney died from a heart attack on 4 December 1955.

  A very nationalistic strip, Bluey and Curley covered all facets of Australian humour. It was at the peak of its popularity during the ’forties but tended to lose some of its appeal and individuality when the characters moved into civilian life. The common enemies of Army life were then missing. Soon after it was released the strip became an outstanding success and, as well as appearing throughout Australia, it also appeared in papers in New Zealand and Canada.’

Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Jessup Frank view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Aria Aub view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Crosby Percy American cartoonist in Australia?view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Samuels Cyril view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Mitchell Harry view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Pigeon William Edwin WEPview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
WEP William Edwin Pigeonview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Fry Win view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Eyre Harry view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
White Unk view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Quayle Jack view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills.
‘Jack Quayle was born in Hobart, Tasmania in 1899. He sold freelance cartoons to The Bulletin and Fairplay, a sports paper, before joining the Daily Telegraph to create Casual Connie as well as daily panels Little Mike and Uncle Brightness. After freelancing for a short period Keith Murdoch asked him to join the Adelaide News as an editorial cartoonist in 1934 and while on that paper created another strip, Dora. Except for the name change, Dora was Casual Connie. After 12 years he came to Sydney to join the staff of the Truth and Daily Mirror, where he created Perce the Punter. In 1960 he joined the Daily Telegraph where Perce continued his punting for another two years.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Carter Ad view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hanniford Harry view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Patterson Betty view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Kinnear M Dview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Campbell Harry view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Heron Leon view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Mailey Arthur view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills.
‘Mailey was an outstanding cricketer who had successfully turned his hand to humour and cartooning but only dabbled in the field of comics.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lindsay Daryl view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Armstrong Mick view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
McRae Alex view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Martin Keith view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hicks Reg ‘Hix’view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills.
‘Reginald Ernest Hicks was born at Kent, England in 1915. He came to Australia with his parents in 1921 and settled in Melbourne. On leaving school at the age of 14, he spent four years learning colour stencil designing and, at the same time, studying music and learning to play the violin. In 1933 he began teaching violin and attending the National Gallery School under Napier Waller and John Rowell. As well as becoming an exhibiting member of the Victorian Artists Society he was supplying freelance caricatures, cartoons, and interviews to various magazines.

  In January 1938, Hicks drew The King’s Treasure which was replaced by The Space Patrol in December. These strips appeared each Friday in The Age’s Junior Section, a half-tabloid booklet that also contained text features. The Space Patrol was our first original science fiction style strip and Captain Rocket Blake was the Australian answer to Flash Gordon. Through 100 episodes Blake battled Black Barok of Mercury, the Marsh-men on Venus, and saved Australia from conquest by the Zio people. It was a comic that bustled with activity.

  While working for the Argus and the Age, Hicks created more newspaper strips than any other Australian cartoonist, yet still found time to freelance and work as a story reader for the Australian Broadcasting Commission and commercial radio. He became a member of Naval Intelligence in 1940 but was released from duty after nine months and joined Associated Newspapers. His long-running domestic humour strip, Family Man, first appeared in the Sun in 1940 and in 1941 the Sunday Sun carried the first episode of his adventure strip, Tightrope Tim.

  Hicks left Associated Newspapers in 1958 and became involved in a number of commercial enterprises but still found time to write and illustrate stories for overseas children’s annuals, design book covers for Hodders and a strip, Debbie, for New Idea. Hicks joined the Adelaide studio of ABC-TV as a graphic designer in 1963 where he remained until his retirement in 1977. A man of many talents, a versatile and prolific artist, Reg Hicks devoted a quarter of a century to comics during which time he helped establish and popularize the adventure strip.... Reg Hicks returned to the comic pages in September 1940 when he commenced drawing Family Man for the Sydney Sun. Wellington Drax was the plump, bespectacled, pipe-smoking family man who always seemed to come off second best in the verbal encounters with his family. His wife, his daughter Versena, and his small son usually managed to outsmart or outwit him no matter what the subject. There were plenty of chuckles and quite a few belly laughs in this domestic comedy that lasted until the late ’fifties. Using a neat, uncluttered style Hicks again made liberal use of the continuous backgrounds which were to characterize the strip.’

Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bragg Bernie view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Donaldson George view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Morrison Joan view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lahm Hottie (Hardtmuth)view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘The Sunday Sun’s replacement for Ginge was Snowy McGann, drawn by Hottie Lahm. Hardtmuth Lahm was born at Tallinn, Estonia in 1912. His father was a jeweller who lost a small fortune in a financial crash and decided to migrate to Australia. A family friend noticed Lahm’s flair for drawing and soon after he enrolled at the East Sydney Technical College he sold his first cartoon to the Sydney Mail. The payment of two guineas had to last a long time as he did not sell another cartoon for two years. A fellow student who couldn’t get his tongue around Hardtmuth nicknamed him ‘Hotpoint’. The name stuck and Lahm started to sign his work ‘Hotpoint’ and this was inevitably shortened to ‘Hottie’.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Panel by panel onlineview full entry
Reference: Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills. [To be indexed fully].
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: online at https://www.comicoz.com/part-one.html

Evans Pennyview full entry
Reference: see Chiswick auctions UK, 29.4.21 lot 254: PENNY EVANS, (AUSTRALIAN, 20TH CENTURY SCHOOL): A studio pottery vase, of baluster form, the interior white and green glazed, the exterior in hues of brown, stamped mark to the base. 10cm high x 8cm diameter
Winkles Henryview full entry
Reference: see Fichter Kunsthandel
May 1, 2021, 5:00 PM CET
Frankfurt, Germany, Lot 125: WINKLES(19th c.), Historical view of Hobart Town, Australia, 19th c., Engraving.
Henry WINKLES (19th century, Great Britain), Historical town view of Hobart Town in Australia, capital of Tasmania and second oldest town in Australia, steel engraving


Inscription: Signed by the artist below the image in the printing plate. Below inscribed with "Hobart Town".

Description: On brown paper mounted finely drawn view of a town at a crossroads with carriages.
Baird Jackview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w ills. ‘In collaboration with Jack Baird, well-known for his paintings of racehorses and other animals, Thompson’s Pip and Emma made its first appearance with a double-page spread on 1 April 1940 and commenced in the Sun-News Pictorial soon afterwards.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Clark Bobview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Boofhead - drawn by Bob Clark and featuring a simplistically drawn, waistcoated young man with an elongated nose sheltered by a cantilever hair style - was amateurish and the humour mundane. It is difficult to fathom the reasons that this strip attracted readers but there can be no disputing its popularity. It continued to run for 29 years until Clark’s death in 1970; dozens of comic books were published reprinting the strip; it appeared briefly in the Sunday Mirror as a Sunday page (featuring a blonde-headed brother, Goofhead); and it brought back into common usage the term ‘boofhead’ in describing a simpleton or fool.

  Clark was very much aware of the shortcomings of his published art and made a number of approaches to the Mirror with a view to improving it. The management was adamant - neither the artwork nor the humour should be altered in any way. While they could not pinpoint the reason for the strip’s popularity they were not prepared to tamper with a successful formula. Clark, who created Boofhead back in the early part of 1939, was a gentle, quiet man who gave thousands of his original drawings to the Spastic Centre for the children to use in colouring exercises.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Coventry Lionel view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Adelaide came into the scene briefly when the Mail began publishing Alec the Airman late in 1941. It was a humorous view of life in the Air Force and notable, mainly, for the remarkably geometrically stylized drawings of Lionel Coventry, an outstanding caricaturist. Alec was grounded in March 1942..’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Durack Elizabethview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Nungalla and Jungalla. Created by Mary and Elizabeth Durack, the comic was the first major attempt to translate Aborigine legends into comic form and to adapt Aboriginal art techniques in both drawings and colour. Elizabeth Durack had illustrated her sister’s Bulletin article on station life with the Aborigines in the Kimberly district and the pair had produced The Way of the Whirlwind, which was published by Consolidated Press in 1941. Nungalla and Jungalla was an excellent early example of how didactic comics could be presented in an attractive and entertaining manner. The stories were suspenseful and interesting; the drawings fresh and unusual; and the vibrant colour in keeping with the theme of the comic. The comic lasted until February 1943 when it was replaced by a redrawn version of Superman.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
O’Brien Kathview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Three weeks prior to the departure of the Duracks another Australian strip was introduced. Wanda the War Girl was drawn by Kath O’Brien, a 28 year old artist from Mackay, North Queensland. As a girl she had travelled Australia with her parents while her father prospected for gold, broke horses, and worked in the outback. O’Brien studied at Brisbane Technical College before going to Sydney in 1937 to spend three years with J. S. Watkins. Journalist Bob Slessor knew that the editor of the Sunday Telegraph, Cyril Pearl, was looking for a strip to replace Nungalla and Jungalla and suggested to O’Brien that she think about coming up with something. Her idea was a girl in the services to ‘give credit to Australian service girls for the marvellous job they are doing’. Pearl liked the samples and asked her to draw the comic for his paper at £9 per week.

  Wanda was a beautiful redhead and was soon coming to grips with Japanese soldiers and German spies in a sequence of encounters that continually left her clothes in tatters and her long, graceful legs and ample bosom well-displayed. No doubt one of the reasons that Wanda the War Girl took on the trappings of a voyeur’s delight was that it was influenced by the strip it had replaced. Black Fury, drawn by another woman artist, Tarpe Mills. The US strip contained more than its fair share of ladies stripped to their lingerie or less as well as elements of bondage. Also, Norman Pett’s Jane, who had been stripping in an opposition paper, could have proved an inspiration.

  As the strip progressed, O'Brien’s style began to reflect confidence and a leaning towards fashion designing could be detected. Gradually O’Brien developed a unique style which resembled some of the work of William Dobell and represented one of the most original and individual styles ever to appear in Australian comics. The early stories were written by a journalist, C. W. Brain, but O’Brien took over the writing after the war. She based her stories on the books by Ashton Woolfe, head of the French Surete, and combined the methods he detailed with current news items in the papers.

  After the war the strip became Wanda. The heroine involved herself in thwarting black-marketeers, foreign spies, smugglers, and the comic took on the mantle of an adventure/detective strip before it finished in 1951. Not only was Wanda reflective of its period but it was one of the first comics to reflect the female point of view..
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bertram Moiraview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘The Daily Mirror did not introduce a locally drawn adventure strip until 8 January 1945. The strip, Jo, was the work of another female artist, this time the 16-years-old Moira Bertram who signed the comic ‘Bert’. Jo was a beautiful, raven-haired dancer who used her magic cape to assist her boyfriend, an American pilot named Serge, to outwit gangsters and the Japanese. The comic only ran for a few months before moving into the comic books published by Frank Johnson and, later, those published by K. G. Murray.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Gould C Sview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Drew Anneview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Kaark the Crow was written by Kenneth Neville and drawn by Anne Drew. While strips about animals and birds were not new, Neville’s innovation was that he made the leading character something of a scoundrel. Kaark tried to take over the valley with the idea of charging the other bush creatures rent and even turned to bushranging for a period. His accomplice in the latter endeavour was Red Jelly who wore a large jam tin over his head and, once again, reflected our writers’ and artists’ fascination with the Ned Kelly mythology. Kaark was full of puns, plays on words, and alliteration and became a particularly readable strip when the drawing was taken over by Walter Cunningham in April 1947. Neville and Drew also collaborated, briefly, on a humorous strip about a small Aborigine boy, Little Fella Nukla.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Davies Bill cartoonist or writer?view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Sealey Dick cartoonist or writer?view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Chatto Keith cartoonist or writer?view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Adye see Anne Drew view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lyon Carlview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘In February 1946, Carl Lyon’s Tim O'Hara appeared in the Daily Mirror. Tim was a reporter and with his press-photographer friend. Pinkie, became involved in the usual relentless pursuit of lawbreakers, always managing to escape the hazards in their path. Apart from being an entertaining adventure story, Tim O’Hara was the first local newspaper strip to feature a fully naked woman. In the absence of any editorial comment, it can only be assumed that it was not detected by the guardians of public morals... Replacing Silver Starr was Carl Lyon’s Black McDermitt - a historical adventure tale set in the nineteenth century. McDermitt was transported to Australia on a charge of cattle stealing and assigned to his wife as a servant. They live on a small farm with their sons and endeavour to carve out a new life. Through a series of misadventures they become involved with Blaxland, Wentworth, and Lawson and McDermitt is a member of the party that makes the historic crossing of the Blue Mountains. Possibly Lyons’ best work, the strip showed, again, that historical subjects could be taught in an entertaining manner through the medium of comics - provided the artist knows what he is doing... Another artist who established his reputation for ‘straight’ strips was Carl Lyon. Carl Raymond Lyon was born at Forest Lodge, NSW in 1903. After leaving school he attended Ultimo Technical College and was another of the many students of Jack Watkins. Lyon spent some years as a theatrical scenery painter before deciding to try and avoid the impact of the Depression by going to Queensland as a cane cutter in 1929. Thinking the Depression would be over, he returned to Sydney in 1931 and was happy to accept any kind of freelance art to try and earn a living. He had work published by Smith’s Weekly, The Bulletin and as well as doing covers for Humour created that magazine’s first comic strip, Tootles, in June 1936. Like most other artists that came to FJP, Lyon’s background was in humorous cartooning but he never had the opportunity to ply his chosen trade. Instead, he commenced working on adventure strips and remained with them until he became associated with Stan Cross in drawing Wally and the Major in 1957 and taking over that strip when Cross retired in 1970. The experience he gained at FJP was instrumental in his having two adventure strips accepted by newspapers in later years. His stable of characters for FJP included K-27, Detective Milt Grey, Barty Malone - Taxi Driver, The Phantom Trooper, PD 4967 and a super-hero, The Eagle.
’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
James Peterview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘The Mirror published its second non-humorous strip in the middle of 1946, The Life of Les Darcy. The work of 21-years-old Peter James, it was one of the very few local comic strips to use a sporting theme. In fact, for a country that has a reputation of being addicted to sport, local sporting strips have been fairly conspicuous by their absence in Australian newspapers. Possibly the artists are at fault and have little or no interest in this area as the newspapers have demonstrated, by using such strips as Joe Palooka, Curley Kayoe, Big Ben Bolt, Mac Divot, and Gunner, that they are prepared to run comics with sporting themes.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Pitt Stanley John view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Stanley John Pitt was born at Rozelle, NSW in 1925. As a schoolboy he devoted more time to drawing than to his schoolwork and was constantly in trouble with his teachers. Through the ‘Speed’ Gordon pages, Pitt became entranced by Raymond’s classic style and that artist’s clean line and penchant for detail left an indelible impression on him. In 1942, while working as a milkman, he sold his first comic book, Anthony Fury, to Consolidated Press. The following year he began selling comics, written by Frank Ashley, to Frank Johnson Publications. Lacking any formal art training, the opportunity to meet and observe such artists as White, Williams, Lyon and Russell provided him with invaluable experience. He produced comic strip advertisements for Colgate-Palmolive in 1945 (a number of which appeared in the comic section of the Sunday Sun) which led to Associated Newspapers placing him under contract to develop a new science fiction strip. Following a dispute regarding the printed size of the strip, Pitt left the paper and the last Silver Starr appeared in November 1948.

  Pitt was soon employed by John Fairfax and Sons for their new paper, the Sunday Herald, and another s-f strip. Captain Power, appeared on 6 March 1949 with the storyline provided by a journalist, Gerry Brown. He continued to handle the comic until June 1950 when the pressure of other work saw him pass the strip onto Peter James. Just before leaving Captain Power, Pitt commenced drawing the Yarmak comics for Young’s Merchandising and, along with assistants, carried this comic through to 1952. With his brother, Reginald, he attempted to get two strips, Lemmy Caution and Mr Midnight, syndicated in the US while doing freelance covers and illustrations for various publishers. When the syndication attempts failed he joined Cleveland Press in 1956 where he created a series of new Silver Starr comics to supplement the reprints of earlier episodes. Following the collapse of the comic book industry, Pitt remained with the company to paint covers for western paperbacks.

  The magnificent artwork on his unpublished comic. Gully Foyle, became legendary throughout the comic world in the late ’sixties. As a result of this work, Pitt was approached by two US companies to handle comic book work for them. With the publication of his work in The Witching Hour #14 (National Periodical Publications, Inc.) and Boris Karloff #33 (Western Publishing), Pitt became the first Australian artist to have original material published in US comic books. In 1969 the US cartoonist A1 Williamson arranged for Pitt to ghost an 11-week sequence of his daily strip. Secret Agent Corrigan, and a further four-weeks in 1972. Because of his detailed style and perfectionist approach, Stanley Pitt has not been a prolific producer of comics - but it has been a case of quality triumphing over quantity. Combining dedication with artistic integrity, he has become recognized as a leading illustrator of science fiction, and the finest comic artist in the classic adventure tradition that Australia has produced.

  Silver Starr was an Australian soldier who had returned from the war to join an expedition into the Earth’s interior. As Silver and his companions, Onro and Dyson, ground their way through the Earth’s crust in a rocket-style ship, the radar-television threw up an image of a beautiful, red-haired girl who was surrounded by lashing tongues of bluish flame. This was Pristine (De Solvo) - Queen of the Flameworld and Pitt’s compliment to Raymond’s Dale Arden. In due course, Pristine became Silver’s girlfriend and was his constant companion through the adventures. The storylines were of average standard for this type of comic but the real attraction was the artwork. Under Pitt’s deft handling, the scenes of rock formations and underground caverns came to life; as did the seas of molten lava and the ship winding its way through rock and water. The Earth’s interior was peopled by a race of giants with massive heads and a race of scaly Ape-men - all ideal subject for Pitt’s fertile imagination. In its latter days, an editorial decision removed the colour from the comic and reduced it drastically in size, robbing it of much of its appeal.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Mahood Margueriteview full entry
Reference: The Loaded Line - Australian Political Caricature 1788-1901, by Marguerite Mahood. Mahood was also an illustrator. [’The Sunday Herald entered the field in January 1949 and revived their Playtime section, this time in colour. The lack of planning behind the section was obvious as comics were added and dropped in the first few months, and some of the strips that had appeared in the earlier section picked up their storyline from 1947, to the confusion of the readers. With a small Aborigine boy, Nim, for his companion, Tom Flynn moved from the outback and looked at the pearling industry on the north coast of Western Australia. Once again, Jolliffe highlighted the impact of white civilization as pearlers trespassed on sacred ground and stole the sacred Churinga of the tribe. In later adventures the location was shifted to New Guinea where Jolliffe depicted the native tribes, customs and habitat with great authenticity. The strip was picked up by the Age who ran it in their Friday Junior Age as a companion feature to The Sandemans. This comic was set in the bushranging period and was the work of Marguerite Mahood, who became better-known for her well-researched and detailed study of early Australian cartoons in her book The Loaded Line.’ - from Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics by John Ryan.
Publishing details: Melbourne University Press, 1973, hc
Fullarton Nan view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Nan Fullarton adapted and illustrated Lewis Carroll’s Alice in Wonderland for 18 weeks before giving way to Joan Lintott’s adaptation of Swift’s Gulliver’s Travels. This allowed Fullarton to concentrate on Frisky, which had started in the Sunday Herald in February under the byline ‘Killibinbin’. Frisky was a small rabbit whose stories were designed for younger children. Aided by clean, accurate linework and an array of charming characters, Fullarton’s strip soon attracted a large following in much the same way as May Gibbs had done a quarter of a century previously. The popularity of Frisky was to see it continue to appear in the papers for over two decades.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Benison Percy view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Also starting in March was Percy Benison’s comic, The Adventures of Billy Koala. Benison was a veteran cartoonist who had contributed to The Lone Hand, The Bulletin, Smith’s Weekly and many other publications and was prominent in the commercial art field. He was particularly interested in boxing and used this as his theme for Billy Koala, with animals being drawn in a semi-realistic fashion as the young bear fought his way through the ranks to become world champion in July 1950. In a period when boxing was booming and large crowds were flocking to the stadiums, the theme was an apt choice.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Cunningham Walterview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Walter Cunningham returned to comics, briefly, in June to illustrate a version of Leslie Rees’s Digit Dick. As Cunningham was also the illustrator of the Digit Dick books the transition to the comic page was quite smooth.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
McGilvray John Cameronview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Willie Fennell, later to establish himself as a character actor on TV and in films, was a leading radio comedian whose phrase ‘Ow yer going, mate?’ was known to millions. The Sydney Truth decided to capitalize on his popularity with the introduction of a Willie comic early in 1949, which was drawn by John McGilvray who signed his work ‘Camac’. Fennell contributed the gags for the first six months but even when this task fell back to McGilvray the strip continued to exhibit the ‘extra grouse slanguage’ favoured by the radio character. Willie mangled the English language while continually dropping ‘h’s’ and it was, perhaps, this down-to-earth approach to humour that made him such a popular figure.

  Born at Packakariki, New Zealand in 1911, John Cameron McGilvray was one of many artists who crossed the Tasman. He arrived in Sydney in 1935 as a qualified signwriter and spent the next few years plying his trade, picking fruit, and walking through New South Wales. He joined Darrell Lea Chocolate Co. in 1937 as an advertising and display artist and spent time at evening classes at East Sydney Technical College. When Quiz Magazine started he became a regular contributor of cartoons and created two comics, Quentin Quiggle Quiz Office Boy and Signwriter Joe. While serving in New Guinea during the war he continued to contribute cartoons and strips to Quiz, many executed with primitive drawing instruments. In 1945 he won a competition run by the Army Educational Journal, Salt, for the design of the best Disneylike characters. With characters that included Maestro Koala Offenbear, Digger Dan, and Willy-Willy, he beat a number of other well-known artists including Sergeant Cyril Tighe and Sapper W. E. Green (Weg). At the same time as he was drawing Willie, another of McGilvray’s strips, Dulcie, was running in a number of lower circulation papers including the Adelaide Express. After his strips finished McGilvray left the field to concentrate on commercial areas until his retirement in 1977.’ etc

Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Evans W Jview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
McCrae Stewartview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘These comics were later handled by Stewart McCrae before he moved on to become the editorial cartoonist for the Courier-Mail. Jean Cullen devised a strip, Pam, which was carried on for a number of years by Mollie Horseman while Lex Bell created a series of small Sunday adventure strips including The Battle for Rufus River.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Jonsson Joe view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘But the most original and successful strip to come out of the Unit was Joe Jonsson’s Uncle Joe’s Horse Radish. Combining some of the characters from his Oigle comic with the theme of his racing strips, Jonsson presented an eccentric cast of country folk whose fortunes hinged on the success or failure of Radish as a racehorse. While winning such noteworthy races as the Cabbage Tree Cup and the Butcher’s Picnic Cup, Radish was anything but a consistent performer. During spells between races, Radish was expected to earn his keep as a general hack around the farm pulling sulkies, dog carts and the plough and doubling as a pack-horse or show-jumper, when required. Uncle Joe and his wife, Gladys, were always worried that Joe would be cut out of the will of Granpa’s sister - the very bossy Aunt Ella. When Ella decided to become a partner in Joe’s racing activities she was anything but a ‘silent partner’, interfering with the training routines and generally making life uncomfortable for the menfolk around the farm. Radish’s jockey was the baldheaded Manfred who when not admiring his own style as a jockey was admiring shy Mabel. With the assistance of Radish the pair became engaged. Oigle tended to be in the background except for those stories that involved Paw-Paw, Radish’s young brother. Miss Fitz-Twiddle, Pat Murphy, Artichoke the goat, and assorted nobblers and touts rounded out the cast of supporting characters.

  Radish looked like a candidate for the glue works and part of his appeal was in his down-trodden appearance. After making his first appearance in the Brisbane Sunday Mail in January 1951, Radish soon spread to most other states and gained a popularity comparable with that experienced by Spark Plug, the hayburner of the US strip Barney Google. When Jonsson died in 1963 the comic was taken over by Ian Gall for some years until the Unit was disbanded because of escalating costs.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bancks Jimmyview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘The newspaper fraternity had hardly recovered from the loss of Smith’s when, in February 1951, Jimmy Bancks repudiated his contract with Associated Newspapers and took his case to the Equity Court. After 20 years as the major attraction in the Sunday Sun, it seemed unthinkable that Ginge would part company with his birthplace. Bancks contended that his £80 per week contract had been breached when the paper had failed-to run Ginger Meggs on the front page of the comic section, as stipulated. For three issues the comic section was published as part of the rotogravure section and, so Associated Newspapers contended, for technical reasons the front page of the comic section was not printed in colour. Ginger Meggs appeared on the third page of the section, in full colour and below the title block Sunday Sun Comics. Even though the comic was published on the front page after Bancks had made a number of protests, the Equity Court ruled that the contract had been breached. At the time of the repudiation, Bancks had signed a contract with his long-term friend, Frank Packer, for the comic to appear in the Sunday Telegraph. Paradoxically, Ginger Meggs’ appearance in the Telegraph on 3 June 1951 was as a double-page centrespread and not on the front page of the comic section. It was an unusual strip as it had Mr and Mrs Meggs discussing their appearance in the new paper and approaching Bancks (who had drawn himself into the strip) about a new dress for Mrs Meggs. Bancks refused. The final panel showed Ginge having been severely battered by Tiger Kelly to prove that while he may have changed papers nothing else had changed. This legal drama did not affect newspapers in other states where Ginger Meggs continued to be published as usual.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lahm Hardtmuth see Hottie Lahmview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘The Sunday Sun’s replacement for Ginge was Snowy McGann, drawn by Hottie Lahm. Hardtmuth Lahm was born at Tallinn, Estonia in 1912. His father was a jeweller who lost a small fortune in a financial crash and decided to migrate to Australia. A family friend noticed Lahm’s flair for drawing and soon after he enrolled at the East Sydney Technical College he sold his first cartoon to the Sydney Mail. The payment of two guineas had to last a long time as he did not sell another cartoon for two years. A fellow student who couldn’t get his tongue around Hardtmuth nicknamed him ‘Hotpoint’. The name stuck and Lahm started to sign his work ‘Hotpoint’ and this was inevitably shortened to ‘Hottie’.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Vivian Ron view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Homer Arthur Wakefield view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Arthur Wakefield Homer was born at Malvern, Victoria in 1926, the son of a civil servant. The family moved to Sydney where Homer was educated at Sydney High School and studied at the National Art School. While he was a student he wrote and acted in radio plays. He drew regularly for The Bulletin for whom he created the cartoon series Andy before joining the staff of Smith’s Weekly. At Smith’s, one of his jobs was to assist Stan Cross on the Dad and Dave strip. Homer created a comic about two radio announcers, Nat and Reg, which ran for a brief period in the ABC Weekly prior to his joining the Army where he served in New Guinea and Borneo, first in a camouflage unit and then as part of the Military Field History Team. On being demobbed, he travelled to England where he studied at the Central School of Arts and Crafts, London and travelled extensively on the continent.

  He freelanced in Fleet Street and was political cartoonist for the Tribune; News Chronicle; and New Statesman before commencing Colonel Pewter. After retiring the strip, Homer followed it with another comic, The Thoughts of Citizen Doe which ran until 1972. He then did regular work for Punch, Private Eye, and The Times as well as graphic reportage for the Sunday Times and BBC TV.

  Homer returned to Australia late in 1976 and settled in Melbourne in partnership with his wife, who was making films for children’s television. He now works regularly for the Age doing theatre drawings, political and social cartoons, and his weekly strip The Uriel Report. To celebrate his return to Australia he drew a special Colonel Pewter story, The Pukka Ashes, to tie-in with the Centenary Cricket Test. The delightful, satirical story raised the hopes of Pewter fans that he had permanently returned to the newspaper - but that was not to be. However, he did make another comeback in October 1978. Due to many readers’ negative reactions to the Walt Disney version of Winnie the Pooh, the Age was forced to drop the comic in mid-story and a 20-year-old Colonel Pewter story, Brolga’s Uncle Jack, was selected as a replacement.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Elmes Rick view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Horak Yaroslavview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Yaroslav Horak was born at Harbin, Manchuria in 1927 to a Czech father and Russian mother. The family migrated to Sydney before the war broke out and Horak spent those years completing his education. After the war, while trying his hand at various jobs, he wrote and drew strips for his own amusement. In 1948 he approached John Edwards who offered him work drawing comics at £2 per page and Horak created two strips, Rick Davis and The Skyman. Edwards was also responsible for Horak’s nickname of ‘Larry’ when he couldn’t get his tongue around Yaroslav and Horak began signing his work in this manner. He then moved onto Syd Nicholls’ publications where he drew Ray Thorpe and Ripon at £4 per page before creating Jet Fury for Pyramid Publications. When the latter company failed, Horak moved to Melbourne where he found a steady outlet for his work with Atlas Publications where he drew such strips as The Lone Wolf, Brenda Starr, and Sergeant Pat. For Atlas he also created The Mask which ran into problems with the authorities and after abandoning the strip in disgust Horak returned to Sydney to do freelance illustrating for K. G. Murray and Woman’s Day. Following Captain Fortune he began drawing Mike Steele . . . Desert Rider to a script supplied by Roger Rowe. It was this comic that revealed the mature Horak style of busy pen lines that was to become familiar in the years ahead. In January 1963 he left for England where he drew comics for D. C. Thompson of Scotland as well as war comics for Fleetway Publications in London. It was during this time he went back to being called Yaroslav.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Sullivan Pat view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Messmer Otto view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Tainsh Doug view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Born in Sydney in 1921, Doug Tainsh came into comics with no real background in cartooning. After being demobilized from the Army, he studied painting for seven years and travelled to Europe where much of his work was published. Tainsh actually learned the craft of cartooning through the evolvement of Speewa Jack, and by the time the strip had run its course Tainsh had developed a very pleasing, clean, concise style that allowed him to restrict his original drawings to slightly larger than the printed size. His battling swaggie panel, Cedric, has been running in the Australasian Post for the last 25 years and he has an outstanding reputation as a television scriptwriter.’

Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Mahony Will view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Francis William Mahony was born in London in 1905 to Australian parents who returned to this country in 1914. He was indentured to Smith & Julius as a commercial artist in 1922 and joined the art staff of the Evening News two years later. Around this period he began using the name Will to avoid confusion with his father, Frank Mahony, who had earned a reputation as one of Australia’s leading painters and cartoonists. After three years at East Sydney Technical College, Mahony joined the Sydney World, then contributed cartoons to the Labor Daily until he joined the Daily Telegraph as a cartoonist in 1940. From 1945 he freelanced, drawing the Chesty Bond strip for five years and contributing cartoons to the Daily Mirror. He rejoined Consolidated Press in 1954 working as a general illustrator before becoming a teacher at the National Art School in 1962. He retired as a teacher in 1976 and now paints and does book illustrations. Clamour was a well-drawn strip, suited to Mahony’s illustrative technique - but it finished abruptly in September 1955 after Casey had left the strip. While other writers were available none could be found with Casey’s knowledge of racing who were capable of scripting a continuity strip.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Dixon Les born Leslie Charles Braileyview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Leslie Charles Brailey at Sydney in July 1910, Les Dixon was adopted by Charles and Lillian Dixon at the age of six months. He attended schools in Balmain and Drummoyne before moving to Cobargo with his family in 1918 on a venture of stripping wattle bark, trapping rabbits, and share dairy farming. During this period his education was conducted by correspondence from the Plunkett Street School, Sydney. In 1929 Dixon returned to Sydney and obtained a job as a blacksmith’s striker for six months before taking a position with the Vacuum Oil Company. He also continued to take art lessons by correspondence. In 1938 he was forced to leave the oil company after sustaining a fracture at the base of his skull and dislocating his neck. While on the dole he studied life drawing at the Catholic Guild and as a freelance was able to sell drawings to The Bulletin, Rydges, and Smith’s Weekly. Called into the Army in 1941 he was discharged in three months due to his inability to wear a tin hat. The same year he joined the staff of Smith’s and remained there until the paper folded. When Russell left Smith’s, Dixon was appointed Art Editor but it was not ratified before the paper closed down. He became Art Editor of the Courier Mail Production Unit and remained there until he took over Bluey and Curley. In his retirement, Dixon drew a comic about a hale and hearty old age pensioner, Sandy Lakes, that is seen in the Central Coast district of NSW in the Advocate... Les Dixon, who was employed on Smith’s Weekly at the time, drew Terry McBride - Sea Scout, Airspeed Holland, Roley Slade of the Customs, Judd Barton - Pearler, and a number of filler pages. Dixon’s forte, both in style and outlook, was humour - and his work on these comics exhibited his discomfort with the adventure strip. But to Dixon, like a number of other artists at FJP, these comics represented an additional £.6-8 per week on top of their regular earnings. For that sort of money, artists were prepared to draw in any style and ignore the discomforts it caused.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Brailey Leslie Charles aka Les Dixonview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
McCloskey John view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Dixon John Dangarview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘John Dangar Dixon was born at Newcastle in 1929, the son of a school principal. After completing his education at Cook Hill Intermediate High he became a trainee window dresser at a softgoods company. He became interested in art and obtained a position as an advertising artist with the same company. In 1945 Dixon moved to Sydney where he took a series of jobs with department stores and advertising agencies. An agency acquaintance suggested that he try the comic book and he set out to take samples to Frank Johnson Publications, towards the end of 1947. His route took him past the offices of H. John Edwards and so started a long association with that company.

  While with Edwards, Dixon drew over 150 issues of Tim Valour, about 50 issues of The Crimson Comet, many issues of Biggies and a variety of filler comics and covers.

  In 1958 he created a ‘new’ Catman Comics for Frew Publications and Captain Strato for Young’s Merchandising and the following year created The Phantom Commando for Horwitz Publications, as well as drawing filler comics in that company’s war comics. Dixon was a prolific producer of comic books and while pressure of work sometimes affected the quality of his drawing no one had a better understanding of the mechanics of the medium. He knew how to progress a story and his understanding and appreciation of panel-to-panel continuity was to stand him in good stead on Air Hawk.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Clarke Ian view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Tabrett Mike view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Amos Hart view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Hartley Vincent Amos was born at Lindfield, NSW in 1916, the son of an insurance company manager. After leaving North Sydney Boys High School he joined the brewing firm of Tooth & Co. in 1932 as a clerk. He enrolled at East Sydney Technical College in 1933 where he studied life drawing and oil painting until the end of 1937. His close friends were a cousin who aspired to be a writer and a thin, unhappy youngster who wanted to become an actor. His cousin was Paul Brickhill who went on to write six best-sellers, including The Dam Busters, Reach for the Sky, and The Great Escape. The would-be actor was the late Peter Finch who distinguished himself in the field and won the first posthumous Academy Award for Best Actor.

Because of the shortage of work, Amos followed the lead of many others and joined the army in 1938. By the time he was discharged in 1945 he had attained the rank of Lieutenant and had served in New Guinea and Borneo. Still wanting a career in the art field he was soon selling cartoons to Rydges and Quiz, before starting work as a freelance for K. G. Murray.

Although he had never drawn a comic strip, Amos’ first assignment for Murray was to draw a full comic book, The Lost Patrol. Not surprisingly, it dealt with Australian soldiers fighting the Japanese in New Guinea and Amos was able to call upon first-hand experience. A further series of comics, including The Moon Mirror and Stark, The Stoneage Man, saw Amos offered the job of illustrating the Devil Doone comic which appeared in Man Junior. Written by Ron Carson-Gold, Devil Doone was a soldier-of-fortune strip that had been handled for a very brief period by June Mendoza and Carl Lyon. While Lyon remained connected with comics Mendoza turned to illustrating and then made her reputation as a portrait painter. Amos took over the strip with the August 1946 issue and continued to draw the strip, each month, until he left in the middle of 1969. During that period he saw the strip reprinted in comic book form running into 44 issues.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
McRae Alec view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Alec McRae retired at the end of 1963 after 25 years of drawing Ben Bowyang, in which time his work had delighted readers.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Russell-Clarke Peter view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Norton John view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘John Norton of Mt. Gambier, South Australia. Norton was an English migrant who had always been interested in art, had spent three years at Brighton Art School, and had his own commercial studio prior to migrating to Australia in 1962. He got the idea for the strip while doodling on the boat on the way over. In yet another coals to Newcastle performance, the highlight of Vicky’s career was when it was syndicated for a period to Katso Lehti in Helsinki.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Emerson Ken view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Kenneth Albert Emerson was born at Sydney in 1930 and spent part of his youth working in Central Queensland. The outdoor life and mobs of roos, big goannas, plains turkeys, and general wildlife made a big impression on him and provided the basis for his future comic strips. He spent three years studying at East Sydney Technical College before spending a few years in New Zealand as a freelance artist and odd-job man. On returning to Sydney he entered the advertising field while selling a few cartoons to The Bulletin. Emerson worked as an animator in the early days of television before returning to advertising where he remained until 1976. During this period he supplied cartoons to a variety of publications as well as drawing comic strips. His own love of the outback is shared by his father-in-law, Eric Jolliffe.

  Like many artists in this country, Emerson has experienced his share of editorial indifference but few strips have suffered the up-and-down existence of The Warrumbunglers. Considering the delightful artwork and original humour, it is difficult to understand why the strip has had to battle so hard to survive. It was dropped by the Sunday Telegraph in July 1969 only to emerge as a four-panel strip in the Sun-Herald in December and to appear in the Melbourne Herald as well. It was dropped, again, in 1971 and remained in hibernation until May 1977 when it was one of the strips selected as a replacement for Fatty Finn in the Sun Herald.

  Emerson’s approach to humour is original and he rarely has to fall back on the well-worn gags of other cartoonists, many of whom have not been averse to rehashing previously published gags. Attuned to contemporary humour and satire, Emerson’s nationalistic approach was to be a harbinger of moves in this direction by other local artists.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Carr Gerald Robertview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.

‘Late in 1975, Gerald Carr published the first issue of his Vampire! comics. With all of its 52 pages drawn by Carr, the comic follows the trend in horror tales set in vogue by Creepy, Eerie, and Vampirella. Because of his irregular publication schedule, it is difficult to know if his super-hero title, Brainmaster & Vixen, is a regular publication. As the only publisher of local material it is to be hoped that he will encourage local contributors rather than reprinting overseas material like his competitors.

Gerald Robert Carr was born at Bendigo, Victoria in 1944 and spent four years studying art at the Bendigo Institute of Technology. While employed as a letterer on the local Walt Disney comics in Sydney he

attended the art classes of Walter Cunningham before moving onto advertising and freelance work. After Brigette he published his own comic fanzine, Wart’s Epic, illustrated a number of Devil Doone strips for K. G. Murray; and in 1975 commenced a comic book line, which publishes his own comics in Vampire! and Brainmaster.

  Brigette was written around the television/pop scene of the ’sixties with its hip language, new fashions, and drug culture. Apart from a brief episode where a supporting male character has his drink spiked with LSD in an effort to discredit him, there was almost a total absence of reference to drugs in the strip. In terms of teenage violence and robbery there was a minimum, despite the fact that such strips as Dick Tracy and Kerry Drake had been featuring, in Australian newspapers, these ‘less desirable’ aspects of teenagers for some years. Go-Set was most reluctant to allow Carr to withdraw the comic for syndication as it had proved one of their most popular features, indicating that it was reaching the audience for which it was designed. Had Carr been willing to bow to editorial pressure and cater to the more conservative elements the comic, probably, would have been assured of a reasonably long run. Carr’s attitude was summed up in his letter published in the Independent...’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Tandberg Paul view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Peverill Ralph William Irving view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Ralph William Irving Peverill was born at Korumba, Victoria in 1932 and studied art at the Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology. Through the influence of Wally Driscoll, he obtained a temporary position as a press artist with the Herald and Weekly Times group in the early ’fifties before eventually drifting to Alice Springs. During this period he turned his hands to all types of jobs to keep the wolf from the door - barman, taxi driver, salesman, ticketwriter, signwriter, and a struggling cartoonist always.

  From the publicity department of Hoyts Theatres he obtained a job as an animator with GTV9 Melbourne. After three years with the channel he returned to Alice Springs where he became a signwriter up and down the track to Darwin. Then he began doing freelance animation from Alice Springs - a situation that continues to this day. He has worked for Hanna-Barbera, Air Programs International and A1 Et Al, the company run by Alex Stitt the well-known cartoon designer. He is currently working on a two-year project, the full length cartoon Grendel, and designing new comic projects with an eye to overseas syndication.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
MacAlpine Gregor view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Adams Neal view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Foley Max view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Maxwell Charles Serle Foley was born at Drummoyne, NSW in 1944. His father was killed by a falling tree in the last months of the war, while he was serving in the Army. Foley began drawing comics as a small boy and became an avid reader of them, often spending his school lunch money to buy them. In the early years, these were secreted in the attic and read by the light of a candle before his mother returned from work. Eventually, the comics were allowed down into his room after he had missed his footing on the rafters and crashed through the ceiling to his waist, amid mortar, battens, and a billowing cloud of dust. On leaving Fort Street High School he spent two years as a copy boy at the Sydney Morning Herald and was a cadet for four years at the Sun under Ron Melville. During this time he studied at East Sydney Technical College for four years. He left the Fairfax organization in 1968 to work for a firm that manufactured flameproof electrical switches. The firm burnt down.

After limited success in producing one-line cartoons he became an artist at a printery for a short period before rejoining Fairfax. For Pix Magazine he created Cindy in August 1970. The voluptuous blonde with a capacity for losing her clothes was originally titled Chesty Blonde. While the name was apt and smile-provoking the editor, aware of Bonds’ copyright on Chesty Bond, wisely decided to change the name to Cindy. While the strip was still running, Foley commenced drawing Max and Min as a replacement for Nan Fullarton’s Frisky.

  The pressure of increasing demands for daily journalistic art convinced Foley that he would have to drop Max and Min - and in one final, climactic adventure he literally killed-off most of the characters. Max and Min remained topical and incisive to the last. In the 300th episode on 4 July 1974, Max and Min are seen departing into a thick, pea soup fog and towards a queue they can make out in the distance. From the final, fog-filled panel rises a single balloon, saying two words - ‘Dole bludgers’.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lants Gerry view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Gerry Lants first began developing Basil in 1965 but it took him five years to reach the point where he was satisfied with the character. At that time he had been working as an illustrator for the Melbourne Herald for some 11 years and the company’s Features Editor, Neil Newnham, suggested that Lants approach Inter Continental Features. When Sol Shifrin agreed to handle the syndication the Herald was the first to buy it and it has been appearing in that paper since November 1970, and soon began appearing in other states. In March 1974 the comic broke into the tight US market. Universal Press Features (syndicators of Doonesbury) agreed to handle the North American rights and sold the strip into 85 outlets. Basil also appears in many other countries and can make the transition to the foreign language press more readily than most strips - for Basil is what is commonly known as a pantomime strip, a comic which contains no dialogue.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Butler Grant view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Piper Lloyd view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Piper had drawn comic books for many publishers during the ’forties before settling-in to a long career as an advertising layout artist and, later, becoming a part-time teacher at the National Art School. Wolfe was a roving adventurer who travelled as fate and fancy prompted him. Wolfe’s strength was its strong storyline and the fact that Piper restricted his wanderings to Australia, giving readers an opportunity to identify with the various suburbs and country towns - and it was these aspects that attracted a large following for the strip.
‘ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Langmead Donald view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Born in Adelaide in 1939, Donald Langmead is the Senior Lecturer in the History of Architecture at the South Australian Institute of Technology. With a string of letters after his name he would seem an unlikely candidate for the ranks of comic strip artists. But beneath the academic exterior is a man whose love of the medium was kindled in the ’forties and ’fifties when he was entranced by the comic books of Amos, Chatto, Dixon, Nicholls, Wedd, Lawson, and the others. However, it was not until 1972 that his interest in entering the field was really aroused. After a boring four week drawing project, he set his students a relief project - ‘Draw a Comic Strip’. A caveman idea came up and Langmead tried to show his students the type of thing he wanted them to do. The idea snowballed and before long he had completed 40 strips. He approached a number of newspapers and when the Adelaide Sunday Mail agreed to take it, The Almost Human strip was born. The comic made its first appearance in January 1973 and began appearing in the Melbourne Sunday Press in September that year. Langmead signed with an English syndicate who, after running a stunning promotion, sold the strip to papers in the US, Brazil, Italy, Denmark, Belgium, and the United Kingdom.

  Langmead sees his characters in an historical context - that human beings have never changed, in spite of environmental and technological change. The little man - nameless - is a loser. His best laid plans turn to nothing. The handful of characters in The Almost Human transfer modem humour to their prehistoric setting as they examine the problems of pollution, the energy crisis, currency fluctuations, domestic problems etc. The comic contains its fair share of sarcasm which Langmead blends fluently with the visual humour.

  Due to litigation, The Almost Human has not reached a large audience in Australia. Now that the legalities have been decided in Langmead’s favour he has altered the name of the comic to Piltdown and will look for a wider, local readership.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Stitt and Weatherhead’s Jigsaw Factory,view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Jigsaw Factory - Stitt and Weatherheadview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Weatherhead - Jigsaw Factory - Stitt and Weatherheadview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Smith George view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Salisbury Allan John view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Allan John Salisbury was born at Kyabram, Victoria in 1949. On completing his education he took a position with the Cyclone Company in Melbourne where he pushed a broom, wrapped parcels and did other routine jobs while working his way towards becoming the company’s advertising officer. In this position he liaised with agencies but did not do any artwork himself. Always interested in comics, he began working on a strip entitled The Ludicrous Life of Lennie the Loser which was autobiographical in theme. Salisbury then went to see Weg, at the Herald, who suggested he would be better off with an agent and recommended Sol Shifrin. As Shifrin already had one pantomime strip in his stable, Basil, he suggested that Salisbury put aside Lennie and look at developing a comic with dialogue. After a long struggle, Fingers and Foes emerged and Shifrin was able to accomplish the almost impossible by selling an American gangster strip to the Americans.’ etc.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Stanley Stephen view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Stephen Stanley was born at Liverpool, England, in 1950 and came to Australia with his parents in 1965. He obtained a place in the South Australian School of Art but became instead, an apprentice signwriter in Whyalla. In 1971 he began drawing a weekly, sponsored cartoon for the Whyalla News and the panel worked its way up to become a regular feature of the editorial page. Stanley began sending cartoons to newspapers and magazines and had one accepted by The Australasian Post, where samples of his work were seen by Shifrin. Contacting Stanley, Shifrin suggested he draw a comic strip and the result was Lafferty.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Wedd Monty (Montague Thomas Archibald)view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Montague Thomas Archibald Wedd was born in Randwick, NSW and, as a small boy, was instructed in art by Oswald Brock at 2s. 6d. per lesson. He left high school during the Depression and, after six months, found a job at Hackett Offset Printing Company at 10s. per week. After six months he became an artist for a furniture manufacturer, spent some time in the Army, and then had a further stint as a furniture artist before joining the forces in 1941 where he served in the Army and then the RAAF. After the war he spent three years studying art under the Commonwealth Reconstruction Training Scheme. During this period he began selling comics to Syd Nicholls including Bert and Ned and Captain Justice, which was responsible for awakening his interest in Australian history and Australiana. After Nicholls had closed his comic line, Wedd began supplying comics to Elmsdale Publications which included TodTrail and Kirk Raven - but he was dissatisfied as the publishers would not allow him to retain the copyright. New Century Press contracted him to do 23 Captain Justice stories for £102 per issue. Returning to Elmsdale he was paid £.160 per issue to draw The Scorpion until that comic ran into problems in Queensland. He then did a series of Captain Justice stories for Calvert Publications before commencing his long association in drawing features for Stamp News. He also began a 16 year association with The Australian Children’s Newspaper for whom he drew many full page adventure comics. From 1958 he contributed regularly to Chuckler’s Weekly with Captain Justice and King Comet...’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Collette Aubrey view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Marks Stan view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Augustine Geoff view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘The 35 years old Geoff Augustine’s Ossie appeared in the pages of the Sun-News Pictorial in April 1976 and began a once-a-week appearance in the Sun-Herald in January 1977. However, Ossie had originally appeared in Ansett Airlines’ inflight magazine. Panorama, in 1974 as a well intentioned tourist wandering in and out of predicaments. Augustine had been an Art Director in an advertising agency and left to become a staff artist with Ansett.

  To launch Ossie as a daily strip, Augustine added a wife, who is worried about her weight but more concerned about getting a dishwasher; a son, Mozzie, and his friends Patsy, Kye, and Fatty. Ossie is another character who seldom wins and even the garden hose and his umbrella continually outsmart him. And when he starts chopping at a tree, as he often does, you know where the tree is going to finish up, one way or another. Augustine uses the children, with their simpler and more direct approach, to give an insight into adult values and preoccupations. Often, the children are quite brutal in their honesty - but usually funny with it. Possibly, Ossie is the only current humour strip that is a genuine reflection of what is happening in suburbia. Certainly, it contains more political and social comments than any other strip.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Fletcher Roger view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Torkan has occupied the front page of the Sunday Telegraph since it first appeared in July 1976. It is the work of Sydney artist Roger Fletcher who only decided to draw the comic when he couldn’t find another artist to illustrate his stories. Torkan caters for the upsurge in demand for heroic-fantasy stories created by the Marvel Comics Group’s adaptation of Robert E. Howard’s Conan the Barbarian....’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Batten Theo view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Theo Batten. A Walkley Award winner for illustration, Batten had created Lucky Cat for the pages of the Women’s Weekly in 1969 where it ran until pressure of work forced Batten to drop it. The comic is aimed at animal lovers and observes the manner in which cats, in particular, see themselves as the focal point of a household. In recent times a parrot has been introduced to the household and Lucky finds that it is far easier to outwit his owners than it is to best the bossy Polly.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Power Paul view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Chizview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Ball Murray view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Maloney Ted view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Linaker Cec view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Santry John and Chesty Bondview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Maynard Ken view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Cullen Fred Cul view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Berk Ira view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bannah Max animatorview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Daly Bob view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Woolley Pat view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
McCausland Ian brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Pinder Phil brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
McClean Neil brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Dickie Peter brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Puckeridge Jon brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Sharp Martin brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Stevens Colin brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Amor Rick brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Curtis Neil brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Porter Don brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Payne Chris brief referenceview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Rafty Tony view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Powis Terry view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Donald Will view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Will Donald came from a long career of cartooning for magazines and newspapers and had been involved at the birth of newspaper comic strips. The simplistic outline style of cartooning that he established in the early ’twenties altered very little during the rest of his career. While quite acceptable on humorous strips, this style did nothing to set the tone for an adventure strip - and most of his comic book stories were of the adventure variety. For NSW Bookstall he created Captain Katseye, Island of Amazement, Mystery Island, Skelt Dorgan’s Treasure, Special Messenger, Rod the Reckless and others before moving on to another publisher. Donald’s cast of characters was severely limited and the same faces kept appearing in different comics under different names. Wherever possible, Donald avoided using anything other than a medium-shot panel, giving a bland sameness to each page. Yet Donald had an ability to produce eye-catching covers - covers which promised far more than the contents of the comic could deliver. Restricted to two and three colours, these covers were quite dramatic and were often accompanied by such legends as All Picture Story of Mystery & Invention, A Thrilling Picture Story Adventure and Thrilling Picture Story of a Race for Riches. Donald’s lack of familiarity with the comic book market and, perhaps, his uncertainty as to the sales potential of these new comics is reflected in his avoidance of the term comics (with its original connotation of funny/humorous) and his need to advise the potential reader of the type of contents behind the cover.

  Donald needn’t have worried about the comics not selling. Provided sufficient newsprint could be obtained, the wartime market was a publisher’s paradise. Never before had they been able to think in terms of such large print runs and not be overly concerned if the finished product left something to be desired. Nor did they have to concern themselves about the return of any unsold publications. Everything readable was pounced upon by the starved readers and even the not-so-readable would disappear from the bookstalls if left on display long enough... Will Donald continued to pump out comics for OPC right through the war years and his output was only matched by Hal English. English’s realistic style of illustrating with heavy black shadows and considerable hatching was almost the opposite of Donald’s - yet, more often than not, the two men found themselves sharing the contents of a full comic. They worked in double-harness inside such titles as The Secret Formula, Enemy Agent, Murder in the Night, The Swinging $.? Death, The Black Ape, The Rubber Foot Mystery and Saboteurs. Among others, Donald created a trouble-shooting detective called Shado McGraw. Donald’s concession to the wartime mood was to give many of his villains foreign-sounding names with a distinct leaning towards the Italians (e.g. Zaroli, Calligoni, Matalini, Largossi, Kardoni etc.). In most cases, all of the villains looked the same with only their names, like the name of the comic, being changed.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Brodie-Mack Edward (Ted) view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Edward (Ted) Brodie-Mack was born in Wellington, New Zealand in 1897. At the age of 18 he spent a year working as a cartoonist on the New Zealand Freelance before becoming a youthful theatrical executive in both Australia and New Zealand. In 1919 he resumed cartooning contributing to The Bulletin and Smith’s Weekly. He became a political and sporting cartoonist for the Sydney Truth and Sun before joining the new Consolidated Press where he remained for the next 26 years. It was during his stint with Consolidated Press that he began drawing comics for NSW Bookstall.

  Apart from an odd assortment of comic pages, verse, cartoons, and text collected under the title Gigglywinks, Brodie-Mack’s major contribution to the comic book field was his series of comics based on the adventures of Kazanda. He blended his natural humorous style with that of the Flash Gordon artist, Alex Raymond, and the resultant

hybrid style was ideal for the comic book page. Brodie-Mack was the first Australian artist to recognize the special requirements of the new medium, consequently his comics flowed in a manner that could not be matched by any of his contemporaries. Such Kazanda stories as The Wild Girl of the Lost Continent, The Forbidden Kingdom, Among the Winged Women, Kazanda Again and The Captives of Capri were a mixture of science fiction and fantasy, each 30 pages long, that provided ideal escapism from the gloomy war situation. Kazanda was a beautiful psychic girl who loved the cruel Sylf, King and Mind-Master of the Lost Continent, and who often found herself on the opposite side to her lover. The basic design of the early pages suggest that the series was originally created with the idea of selling it to newspapers as a Sunday page. The storylines, which were far removed from the comic book stories of the period, were the work of Peter Amos.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Amos Peterview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Peter Amos was the nom-de-plume of Archie E. Martin who had been writing since the early part of the century when he had been on the staff of C. J. Dennis’ The Critic. He had contributed some humorous items to The Gadfly from the first issue in 1906 and in 1907, at the age of 17, took over the editorship of that magazine. Later in his career, Martin went to the US where he gained a reputation as a novel writer. The standard of the Kazanda stories was such that in 1945 the collaborators were able to sell the first story to the Fiction House group (publishers of Jumbo, Jungle, Planet, Fight etc.) in New York where it was serialized through five issues of Rangers Comics. It was a unique breakthrough to get into the highly competitive US market and this success was not repeated until the early ’seventies when Stanley Pitt was invited to draw a series of American-scripted stories.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Martin Archie Eview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Peter Amos was the nom-de-plume of Archie E. Martin who had been writing since the early part of the century when he had been on the staff of C. J. Dennis’ The Critic. He had contributed some humorous items to The Gadfly from the first issue in 1906 and in 1907, at the age of 17, took over the editorship of that magazine. Later in his career, Martin went to the US where he gained a reputation as a novel writer. The standard of the Kazanda stories was such that in 1945 the collaborators were able to sell the first story to the Fiction House group (publishers of Jumbo, Jungle, Planet, Fight etc.) in New York where it was serialized through five issues of Rangers Comics. It was a unique breakthrough to get into the highly competitive US market and this success was not repeated until the early ’seventies when Stanley Pitt was invited to draw a series of American-scripted stories.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Pitt Stanley view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Peter Amos was the nom-de-plume of Archie E. Martin who had been writing since the early part of the century when he had been on the staff of C. J. Dennis’ The Critic. He had contributed some humorous items to The Gadfly from the first issue in 1906 and in 1907, at the age of 17, took over the editorship of that magazine. Later in his career, Martin went to the US where he gained a reputation as a novel writer. The standard of the Kazanda stories was such that in 1945 the collaborators were able to sell the first story to the Fiction House group (publishers of Jumbo, Jungle, Planet, Fight etc.) in New York where it was serialized through five issues of Rangers Comics. It was a unique breakthrough to get into the highly competitive US market and this success was not repeated until the early ’seventies when Stanley Pitt was invited to draw a series of American-scripted stories.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Cook Noelview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Noel Cook was another contributor to NSW Bookstall and, basically he continued the sf/fantasy theme that he had established with his newspaper strip, Peter, in 1929. With such titles as Pirate Planet and Peril Planet his art was derivative of Alex Raymond and Borne Hogarth - the derivative sources of many Australian comic artists during the 1940s. Most of his stories were set in the then far-off 1960s and 1970s where he saw the world constantly under threat from either Martian invaders or a mad scientist and where space travellers were dressed like deep sea divers. Cook did not restrict his efforts to one company, contributing work to Offset Printing Company, Frank Johnson, K. G. Murray and a number of smaller companies. More than once, he was able to re-work old stories by changing the names of the characters and re-positioning some of the panels. Apparently, such re-working was acceptable to publishers or went unnoticed... Noel Cook became a prolific producer of comics for OPC due, basically, to the reprinting of his former newspaper strips Dick Dean, Star Reporter, Bobby and Betty and Peter. By virtue of their two and a half years run in the Daily Telegraph, Bobby and Betty appeared in comic books longer than any of Cook’s other strips up until the time he created Kokey Koala...   Noel Cook contributed irregular adventure strips, including Boris of Mars, but towards the latter stages of the war had a regular strip in Hawk Larse - In the Year 2000 AD. Newton Hedstrom’s strips were usually one-shots with no continuing characters.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hubble Tom view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Colt Jimview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Jim Colt specialized in drawing adventure tales with a war content. With RedTex, Lofty Regan, Commando Conn, South Sea Sam, Gus of the Gulf and Black Hawk, Colt continually showed that the Allies were far more intelligent and resourceful than the enemy. The Nazis were usually depicted as having a square head, crew cut and a monocle and against Colt’s heroes they could only respond with an Ach!, Blitzen! or Himmel!. The Japs appeared as some form of sub-human species who spoke in script. A translation of what they were saying probably formed the basis for a Chinese menu or a scale of charges from a Chinese laundry as it is doubtful if Colt or any of our other comic artists were fluent in Japanese. Colt had a bold, open style of drawing that was both simple and effective. His layouts and containment of text/dialogue demonstrated that he had a better understanding of the medium than many of his more experienced fellow-artists.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Steele Redview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘After drawing The Man in the Scarlet Mask, Special Agents Revenge and Sabotage, English hit on a successful character in the form of Red Steele . . . British Agent. Red Steele made his debut in a comic titled The Cobra Woman which was an experiment in formats by OPC. Most comics measured approximately 24 cm high by 17.5 cm wide, with coloured outer covers and black and white interior pages. The Cobra Woman was half of the normal size while red and blue overlays were added to the interior pages. Either the experiment proved too costly or the publishers found that readers were not prepared to pay 6d. for a miniature comic and, within a few issues, the comic was back to normal size.

  The stories of Red Steele covered all facets of Secret Service activities and while there was a tendency to use text to describe action they were well scripted and among the better written comics of the period. English used large areas of black and white for contrast in giving his pages a mood of mystery and the effect was often heightened by his experiments with charcoal and grease pencil. Another important contribution that English made to OPC was his cover work. This was the first time that painted covers had been used instead of line drawings and often the same illustration was used on both front and back covers. These garish, action-packed renderings by English remain some of the best cover work to appear on comics in this country and must have attracted many buyers.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Litchfield Geoffview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Geoff Litchfield was one of the more talented artists to work for OPC. However, either because he was moonlighting or felt there was a stigma attached to drawing comics, he hid his activities behind the signatures ‘Gosh’ and ‘Golly’. While he drew a number of series, his realistic style and careful attention to detail was seen to its best advantage in Okaie - Master of the Jungle. This strip featured such pre-historic animals as the sabre-tooth tiger, dinosaurs and battle scenes that would not have been out of place in Hal Foster’s Prince Valiant. Whether in the outback of Australia or some more exotic locale, Litchfield’s storylines usually contained more substance than the average comic and it is regrettable that the volume of his comic work was so small.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Theo ? unidentified cartoonist view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Butler ? unidentified cartoonist possibly Grantview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Kilgreen ? unidentified cartoonist view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Rice Norm view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘...Norm Rice. Like Bancks, Gurney’s shoes were hard to fill and Rice was only coming to grips with the comic when he was killed in a car accident inside a year... Norm Rice drew such strips as Dr Darbill, Steele Carewe and Nick Carver of the Circus; Bruce Cousins guided the adventures of Greg Bartlett, Steve Monson, Johnny Fraser and The Masked Archer; while Dick Alderton (creator of the Daily Mirror’s Nursie panel) drew Koko & Katie, Wise Child and even the odd adventure strip like Tug Boat Toby and Ken Bailey. Frank Jessup continued the gentle fantasy theme introduced with his Marmaduke with the whimsical adventures of Professor Darwin, Captain Spadger and the ‘Nancy Belle’, Barbara and filler pages such as Mulga Mick, Pete and Molly and Gran pop. Ron Broadley’s contribution was in the form of one-page fillers of Dabs, Jonesy, Slipstream Sam, Junior and an unusual character in Shadowman. By and large, Australian comic artists did not embrace the super-hero concept that had taken over the pages of the US comic book - but Shadowman, with his powers of invisibility, certainly fell into that category, as did Powerman drawn by Norm Rice and, later, John Delaney.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Cousins Bruce view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Alderton Dick view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Williams Rhys view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Rhys Williams went on to make a name for himself in the wider world of art but in the early ’forties he was drawing Terror Island, The House of Fear, Ice Adventure and a number of other strips. Except for the odd panel containing a figure study there was nothing exceptional about his comics except an obvious understanding of basic drawing. However, Williams drew a series based on Aborigine legends with such titles as The Laughing Frog, Thugine the Great Serpent, and The Sacred Bullroarer which were clearly superior to his other comic book work. The series also represented the first attempt to portray such legends in comic books.

Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hedstrom Newton Sview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Broadley Ron view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Jensen John view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Shelley Ralph and Norren view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Mercier Emile .view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘The son of a French baker, Emile Alfred Mercier was born in New Caledonia in 1901. He came to Australia in 1919 and took a clerical position with a commercial house doing a little translation during the day and spending his evenings absorbing art at Julian Ashton’s school. On the strength of selling a drawing to a Sydney newspaper in the early ’twenties, the translator-clerk resigned to make his living from drawing. He didn’t sell another drawing for six months. Limited by his command of the language, Mercier took whatever jobs came to hand - office boy, work on coastal ships, a spruiker at the Royal Easter Show, bit parts in stage melodramas. Freelance sales to Melbourne Punch, Smith’s Weekly, The Bulletin and many smaller publications helped him survive. Eventually he obtained regular freelance work with Truth and Daily Mirror in 1940 and for Truth created two comic strips, News Splashes and Week Spots. In 1941 his Fen Pushers strip commenced in the ABC Weekly and soon after he linked up with Frank Johnson Publications.

  It wasn’t until 1949 that Mercier achieved his lifelong ambition of a full-time job with a newspaper when he joined the Sydney Sun. His daily topical cartoons were filled with odd-ball characters who bounced around on springs or stilts; many dogs and battle-scarred cats; grog artists from all levels of society; hilarious signs and posters in the background with outrageous names (‘Fearless Fwyp’, ‘Quincy J Erpnewt’, ‘Higglemoat’s Hair Hormones’, ‘Bruhl’s Brew’, ‘The Muckadilla Milk Money Thief, etc.) and regular use of the words ‘gravy’, ‘shrdlu’ and ‘yak’. By the time he officially retired from the Sun in 1968, Mercier had become one of the most widely read and best loved cartoonists in the country.

  But the public who ‘discovered’ Mercier’s zany and rib-tickling humour in newspapers were a long way behind the comic book readers who had been enjoying his unique talent since the early ’forties. For FJP, Mercier created a series of parodies which delighted readers both young and old. Over three decades later, these comics remain as testimony as to what can be done with the comic book medium to make us laugh. Secret Agent XXX13 aimed its shots at Secret Agent X-9, created by Alex Raymond and Dasheill Hammett; Mudrake the Magician (with Lophar and Princess Narka) gestured hypnotically at Mandrake; Speed Umplestoop satirized Speed Gordon; Supa Dupa Man (‘The Big Twist’) leaped over the king of the US comic books in a single bound; Tripalong Hoppitty and Three-Gun Ferdie (The Pride of the Prairie) were cowboys who left the West gasping and the readers holding their sides; and Wocko the Beaut, in his singlet, swim trunks and bowler hat was the true spirit of comic book super-heroes, emerging from the pages of a comic book when his name was evoked. Apart from poking fun at the comics field, Mercier drew many other strips including Doc McSwiggle, Bowyang Bill and the Snifter Princess, The Case of the Haunted Piecrust (a Sherlock Holmes parody) and the delightfully titled Search for the Gnu-Gnah. It was clear that Mercier enjoyed his work and his exuberance was imparted to his clever scripts and drawings. While many of his strips were reprinted in one-shot titles it is to be regretted that examples of the major portion of Mercier’s comic book work survive only in the hands of private collectors.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Shelley Norren and Ralph view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Headley A C known as Chuck or Alfview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
White Cec view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Cecil White was born in Auckland, New Zealand in 1900. He is said to have acquired the nickname ‘Unk’ as a result of his scribbled drawings as a small child. Quoting Rudyard Kipling, his uncle said, ‘Ung was a maker of pictures who fashioned an image of snow’ - and promptly dubbed his nephew ‘Ung’. White’s baby sister had difficulty pronouncing it with the result that Unk emerged in its place. On leaving school, the only work he could find that was related to drawing was in the ticket-writing room of an Auckland Drapers, Milne and Choice. While boring and repetitive, the ticket-writing taught White the elements of speedy drawing and when he started the Auckland Sketch Club, along with George Finey and Robert Johnson, he would often produce 30 or more sketches in an afternoon. In 1922, he came to Australia with Finey and Frank Lynch, the sculptor, and despite an almost complete lack of training was able to support himself. Most of his early sales were to Aussie, a magazine •that had come out of the trenches of the First World War. During his early days in Sydney, he shared a bare room with Noel Cook (another New Zealander) and other artists, drinking from empty jam tins and using extra wheatsacks on his bed to keep out the cold. It was during this period that he became part of the Bohemian group of wild boys which includes the likes of Phil Lindsay, Joe Lynch, Mervyn O’Hara, Mick Paul, Syd Nicholls, Jack Quayle, George Finey, Jack Waring and Lance Driffield.

Soon, his bold use of black and white attracted the larger papers and journals and his work appeared regularly in The Bulletin, Smith’s Weekly and Beckett’s Budget. He went to Paris in 1927, defraying some of his costs by sketching his impressions of various ports and sending them back to Australia. He then moved on to London where he sold his work to The Bystander, Tatler and similar magazines and established a healthy demand for his material. But the weather was not to his liking and he returned to Australia where he created his newspaper strip, Freckles.

White intended to go to Spain in 1936 but had only reached England when the Spanish Civil War broke out. Instead, he went to Panama and then on to Costa Rica before returning home a year later. He brought back with him a collection of pictures which were exhibited at Farmers and of which Norman Lindsay wrote : ‘These travel sketches of Unk White’s are the most brilliant of their sort I have ever seen. They have the precise drawing of careful study and at the same time the movement and vitality of a thing seen and jotted down in passing’.

During the war years, White did many outstanding action sketches of servicemen including the book Diggers, published in 1943, and FJP published a number of collections of his cartoons from The Bulletin during the ’forties. Through the ’sixties and early ’seventies his sketchbooks of various historical buildings and landmarks were highly praised.

Like most artists at FJP, White was assigned a different story character for each weekly issue. The Lost Country, which made its debut in Magic Comics in August, 1941, was similar in both theme and presentation to the Blue Hardy tale. Dr Evil and the Robot Man and Don Taylor and Wix were both variations on the ‘evil doctor’ theme and done in the best tradition of the, then, popular Saturday afternoon movie serial. Later, a number of chapters of the Dr Evil strip were collected and reprinted as a one-shot comic. The reprinting of previously published comics was quite a common practice with FJP...’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Finey George started the Auckland Sketch Club refview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Johnson Robert started the Auckland Sketch Club refview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lindsay Phil view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lynch Joeview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
O’Hara Mervyn view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Paul Mick view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Nicholls Syd view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Quayle Jack , view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Jack Waring view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Russell Dan view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Born in 1906 at Millers Point, Dan Russell is the brother of Jim Russell. Although he began his working life as a clerk he was soon studying at night in the art schools of Julian Ashton and Wattie Watkins. In 1928-29 he was secretary for the Australian Black and White Artists and in 1937 became the treasurer for the re-formed Black and White Artists’ Club. He worked in advertising and commercial art for a few years prior to World War II until the introduction of the FJP line gave him the opportunity to break into cartooning. After the war he travelled in the US, Mexico and Canada studying cartoon techniques and methods returning in time to join the Allied Authors and Artists publishing group. In 1952 he was a staff artist on the Daily Mirror and Truth before becoming involved in AM Magazine. He joined the Adelaide Advertiser in 1953 as a political cartoonist then moved on to the Adelaide News and Sunday Mail in 1955. As well as creating Darky, the Kid from Snowy River for this group he served as an illustrator, sporting cartoonist and general topical humour cartoonist until his retirement in 1970.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Driffield Lance view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Delaney John view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Porter Eric view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Edington Alex view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
White Anthony view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Watkins Jack view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lawson Lenview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Through June 1954 the comics industry found itself under public scrutiny as newspapers carried accounts of the trial of Len Lawson for rape and the judge’s subsequent sentence of death. The newspapers highlighted the fact that Lawson was a comic artist who drew comics containing violence that ‘frequently depicted bosomy heroines’. The newly formed Queensland Literature Board of Review promptly banned The Lone Avenger in August - which seemed to be an emotional reaction to Lawson’s crime rather than anything inherent in the comic.

  After Lawson’s sentence was commuted to 14 years imprisonment, he asked to be allowed to continue to draw comics from prison to support his wife and children. When the request was denied the comic was passed on to Les Such.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Stanley Pittview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Clements Stan view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hoffman Henry Edwardview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Henry Edward Hoffmann was born at Birkenhead, South Australia in 1899. At the age of 16 he enlisted in the AIF and became a signaller. He was gassed in France and after a period on convalescence in England returned home in 1919. He joined the staff of Smith Channon & Co, customs and forwarding agents, in 1921 and became a partner in that company in 1945. Ill health forced his retirement as an active member of the company in 1961 and he died in 1972.

  In 1943, Hoffmann was approached by Phillip Weame, a 17-year-old student artist who had drawn a science fiction comic which he wanted published. When another art student, Max Judd, produced sufficient additional pages to fill out the issue, Hoffmann agreed to publish the comic. It was titled after Weame’s strip, The Legion of Space, and contained four pages of Judd’s continuing series, Sky Police. The comic sold well and Hoffmann asked Weame to produce another comic and to see if other art students were interested in drawing comics. Weame approached another student, Doug Maxted, who jumped at the opportunity to earn additional money. In November, Weame’s second story, The Space Legionnaires, was published along with more of Judd’s work and three pages of Maxted’s Uncle Si. At this stage Weame went into the army and Hoffmann asked Maxted to continue drawing Uncle Si as well as creating new characters to fill out the comics. Maxted agreed and the Hoffmann line was under way.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Maxted Doug view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Douglas Francis Maxted was bom in London in 1920 and as a small child settled with his family in Adelaide. While studying art under Milward Grey he met Weame and Judd and started contributing to Hoffmann’s comic books. For Maxted, who was working as a machine operator with a refrigerator manufacturer, drawing comics presented him with an opportunity to earn more money than through his normal occupation. Hoffmann offered a page rate of £4 10s. which was almost equal to the weekly basic wage. As Maxted soon became capable of drawing up to six pages each week, the payment represented unexpected riches. He added to his range of characters by creating The Family Next Door, Pirate Pete, Rollo of the Big Top, and many filler pages.

  Towards the end of 1947, Maxted decided to publish his own comics in addition to his work for Hoffmann. He produced a dummy of Ben Barbary Bushranger Comics and Gordon and Gotch placed an order for 60 000 copies of a 32-page comic book to sell at 6d. Maxted was paid £750 of which some £400 went towards printing costs. As well as Ben Barbary, the comic contained Vesta the Vesuvian, Captain Carver, Little Bosco, and Peter Dragon of Scotland Yard. Maxted also introduced the Cobbers Page which attracted mail from all over Australia as well as New Zealand, Malaysia and Singapore. After nine issues, he decided to introduce another comic, Triggo Sparks, but his timing was poor. The cost of newsprint was continuing to rise and the competition from US reprints was beginning to place the publishers of local material under pressure. Hoffmann left the field in 1949 and Maxted followed soon after. Gordon and Gotch had introduced a ‘sale or return’ condition on publications and when he found his garage beginning to fill with unsold books he arranged for a New Zealand firm to buy his returns and quit the field.

  Maxted worked for various advertising agencies and during this period produced two Lee Saxon comic books, which were used as promotional material by the hypnotist. After a period as art editor at Rigby he left for a working holiday in England in 1962. He has remained there ever since, working almost exclusively for Fleetway Publications/International Publishing Corporation contributing to such comics as Hotspur, Valiant, Wizard, Buster, and Scorcher. He currently draws The Hard Man which appears in Roy of the Rovers each week.

  Maxted and Hoffmann combined to produce comics which added variety to the local comic book field during the 1943-9 period and, temporarily at least, broke the Sydney-Melbourne stranglehold on the market. Hoffmann also encouraged such artists as Leonard Miatke/Starr, John Egan and Jim Stapleton by publishing their early efforts. He was an entrepreneur who shared his profits with his artists in the form of high page rates and as such deserves to be remembered.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Miatke Leonard view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Starr Leonard view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Egan John view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Stapleton Jim view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Parkinson John view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Chatto Keith view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Ronald Keith Chatto was born at Kogarah, NSW in 1924, the son of an accountancy clerk. Educated at Sydney Boys High and Sydney Grammar School, Chatto’s schooldays were interspersed with constant bouts of sickness and he often relieved the boredom by sketching. His father, then working as an accountant for Smith’s Weekly, showed his work to the art staff and Jim Russell encouraged Chatto by inviting him to attend the weekly art classes held in Smith’s attic studio. On leaving school he worked in the art department of Greater Union Theatres, then drawing recognition charts for the Air  Training Corps before joining the RAAF. Within a week of being demobilized in the middle of 1946 he had sold an adventure comic strip, Destiny Scott, to the Sydney Morning Herald for use in their midweek Playtime section. When the strip ended he became involved with All-Australian Comics group, contributing such strips as Bunny Allen, The Glamour Girl and The Buccaneer. In 1949 he created The Lone Wolf for Atlas Publications and in 1954 became associated with Larry S. Cleland in producing the controversial Steven Carlisle before moving on to produce covers for both H. John Edwards and Cleveland Press.

  While at Cleveland he drew The Twilight Ranger and El Lobo before the bottom fell out of the market with the advent of television. Chatto joined the ‘enemy’ and became a freelance cinecameraman and film producer and has remained in the field. He has, however, continued to be associated with the comics field on a part-time basis, drawing comic book covers for Page Publications and a series of Skippy comics. He originated Flame and Ash for Flame Magazine and Randy and Cee Cee for Fury in 1972. In the middle of 1977 he began drawing the Sunday version of Air Hawk and the Flying Doctor having previously ghosted the daily strip for a short period in 1972. Throughout his career, Chatto’s work has been characterized by his attention to detail; his penchant for drawing sexy women; and his strong storylines. He has an outstanding reputation in the fields of films and publishing for reliability and when new projects are mooted Chatto is usually one of the first people approached.

Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Badior Don view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Morton Tex view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Edwards Henry John view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Such Les view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Mendoza June view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Murray K Gview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Murray K Gview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hayles Vernon view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Belbin Phil view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Phillip Bertram Johnstone Belbin was born at Beecroft, NSW in 1925. As a small boy he showed a talent for art and drew many comics for his own amusement using the established comic characters from the newspapers. His first published work was a calendar for a metallurgist, drawn when he was thirteen years old. He spent two years at East Sydney Technical College and a year in the art department of the Sydney Sun before joining the Air Force in 1943. After serving overseas he returned to civilian life in March 1946 and began contributing to FJP five months later. While drawing comics for FJP he illustrated the H. C. Bryant editions of Treasure Island, Little Women and others before commencing a 30 year association with K. G. Murray. For this company he drew Peril on Venus for Climax Comics; illustrations for most of the KGM publications; the Jimmy Smart and Flash Cain comics for their pocket magazines; and many hundreds of cartoons. Some years after joining KGM Belbin stopped signing his work - and all of his cartoons appeared under a variety of pseudonyms including ‘Humph’ and ‘Duke’.

  As well as working for KGM he freelanced to other publishers and advertising agencies. Belbin became the first Australian artist to be commissioned to do illustrations for the Reader’s Digest Condensed Books and in 1974 his work received a Citation for Merit from the New York Society of Illustrators. Between acting as Art Editor for Gredown Pty Ltd and painting covers for many of their comics, he continues to freelance and, when time permits, devotes time to his passenger hauling railway that runs around the perimeter of his home.

  Belbin is another of the many artists with the desire and ability to draw comics who cannot accept the economics of the field. In 1969 he toyed with the idea of entering the newspaper strip field and produced five weeks of an adventure comic, The Earlybirds. The strip dealt with a team of flying, female troubleshooters and showed Belbin’s affinity for the medium. Most of the artwork from this comic eventually appeared as part of an Air Hawk adventure.

  Belbin’s best-known work for FJP was The Raven, a mysterious flyer ‘whose name strikes terror into the hearts of criminals all over the world’. The Raven made its first appearance in Triumph Comics in September 1946. Like many comic artists of the period, Belbin’s early work exhibited the influence of Raymond and Hogarth. Belbin drew Ace Bradley for the first issue of Gem Comics but this character soon gave way to additional stories of The Raven. By the time Gem Comics had ceased publication, early in 1950, Belbin had developed his own very distinctive style which stamped him as one of the more skilful adventure comic artists the field has produced.’ And other refs
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Chapman Peterview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Peter Chapman, who was to become another prolific producer of comics, came to FJP soon after the war. In conjunction with his brother, Ross, he had contributed such comics as Jungle Patrol and Steve Conrad before attempting Rocky Ned on his own. All of the comics showed his inexperience. Eventually, Chapman settled on the character of Captain Jerry Winter, an independent cargo ship operator. When the character made the transition to Gem Comics the theme changed to science fiction and the series was spread through some two dozen issues. Chapman also drew The Vampire, a curvaceous costumed heroine for Gem Comics No. 16. When remainder copies of this comic were found in some Xmas stockings in 1949, it was cited in the Melbourne press as being typical of the ‘horror’ comics that were ‘luridly illustrated’. The report was typical of the sensational, short-lived outbursts against comics that surface in the press from time to time. In this case, it must have been a slow news day as one of the comics cited was Mercier’s The Case of the Haunted Piecrust!

  Chapman’s work improved as he drew Diana Hastings as well as covers for later issues of Gem Comics. It was Chapman who introduced Phil Belbin to the FJP ranks where Belbin polished his natural talents as a comic artist and became a regular contributor.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Piper Lloyd view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Borella-Swan Jim view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Mather Arthur view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Trueman Michael view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Sullivan Pat nephewview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Pat Sullivan, a nephew of the creator of Felix the Cat, had been able to persuade the government that he should be allowed to import proofs of his uncle’s strip on which he held the copyright. In company with Jack Bruce, Sullivan wanted to publish a line of comics to add to the limited number of story magazines that Elmsdale Publications had been producing. However, they needed to publish more than justified and, once again, Fate took a hand when it steered George Needham in their direction.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Needham George view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘George Needham was born in London in 1903 and came to Australia with his parents in 1915. After attending Prahran Technical College from an early age he obtained a position with the art department of Union Theatres doing artwork for motion picture advertising. At the age of 20 he became head artist of Victory Publicity, concentrating on lithographic and silk screen illustrations. In 1925 he started to attend drawing classes at the Victorian National Gallery and became interested in Max Meldrum’s theory of tonal realism and was, later, influenced by the more modem approach of George Bell. In the late ’twenties, he contributed a comic strip, The Dwight Family, to Table Talk as well as drawing some of the first cartoons for the Melbourne Age in the mid-’thirties. In 1938, after a successful one man exhibition of oil paintings at Margaret McClean’s Gallery, he came to Sydney as the manager of Victory Publicity.

  During the war he was involved in the production of various government posters for propaganda, war loans etc. and when the war ended returned to advertising agencies. In 1946 he developed a series of self-contained strips, called The Bosun and Choclit, with a view to selling it as a newspaper strip. When Elmsdale Publications saw the samples they suggested the strips be converted to a comic book format and that it be published each month on a profit sharing basis. Needham accepted but because of his background in fine art, was embarrassed by the thought of drawing comic books - so the early issues were signed ‘George Robb’, a variation on his wife’s name.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Conrade Des view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Barton Art view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Sherlock N M (‘Lock’)view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lock aka Sherlock N M view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Hill Jon view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Orchard Angus view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Gill Bill view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Alison Ian view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
 Grainger Walter A various refsview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lush A Lyall view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘A. Lyall Lush, a commercial artist. Lush was intent on producing a comic with a high moral tone ‘without introducing slangy stories inculcating wrong attitudes to crime, war, and people’. The lead feature was the didactic Discovery which examined the history of the peoples of the Pacific Ocean by means of text set below each comic frame. It was illustrated by a number of artists including Maxted and Lush. Rosamond Stokes drew Fun at Cockatoo Island, an animal tale set in the North Island ofNew Zealand, and Pogl and Namja, a story of ‘two copper skinned children’ who lived on a mission station in Central Australia. Stokes had an appealing way of drawing animals and Aborigine children but the storylines were too simplistic and below the interest of the average reader. Des Conrades, whose style was similar to that of the young Len Lawson, drew Professor Bluntbrain and Bobby Brent - The News Boy which were closer to the average comic, both in theme and execution. Pacific Pictorial survived for two years but at the finish was down to 20 pages including covers. Lush also attempted another moralistic-style comic, Capers - but like Pacific Pictorial, it had a short life.

Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Lee Frankview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Also from Adelaide was The Atomic Cricket Ball - a one-shot title drawn by Frank Lee, a well-known sporting cartoonist. The comic was a humorous account of the 1946-47 Test Cricket series in which Lee caricatured prominent cricketers. A comic book with a sporting theme was a rarity.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Wilkinson Jeff (‘Wilky’) view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bradford Royce (‘Brad’)view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Tighe Cyril view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Ryan Don view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Ashley Frank and Jimmy view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Wheelahan Paul view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Paul Wheelahan was born at Bombala, NSW in 1930, the son of a mounted policeman. He completed his education in Goulburn and Muswellbrook and came to Sydney in 1947 to find work and locate Stan Pitt. Wheelahan had been entranced by Pitt’s Silver Starr and wanted to meet the creator. The pair became friends and during 1949-50 Pitt gave Wheelahan work in inking sections of Yarmak and Captain Power. Around the same period he began doing various art jobs for H. John Edwards including covers for the Fiction House line of reprints and filler comics.

  Unable to earn a full-time living from art, Wheelahan went to Armidale to work as a powder monkey. During his absence, Edwards published a 10-page Steve Ashley comic that Wheelahan had drawn much earlier. Seeing the work in print re-awakened his artistic ambitions and in 1954 he returned to Sydney to work as a foundry labourer and process worker while doing freelance covers for Edwards along with another two Steve Ashley comics. In 1955 he went to Young’s Merchandising and started his career as a full-time comic artist. As well as Davy Crocket and The Panther, he drew 10 issues of The Raven commencing in July 1962. Wheelahan was developing an interesting Cain vs Abel theme in The Raven when, after the death of Charles Young, the company was closed.

  Wheelahan produced his best comic art for two issues of Rex Strong, a space patrol commander who looked very much like the film actor John Derek, published by Magazine Management (a successor to Ayers and James) in 1960. The following year he developed both daily and Sunday versions of a newspaper strip based on Arthur Upfield’s Napoleon Bonaparte but the strip failed to be syndicated.

  A self-taught artist, Wheelahan’s style was sparse, devoid of un-needed detail and similar to the US comic artist Steve Ditko. The strength of Wheelahan’s comics lay in his storylines. When Young’s Merchandising folded, Wheelahan went to Cleveland Press as a writer of western novels where, under such names as ‘Brett McKinley’ and ‘Emerson Dodge’, he has written some 500 novels.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Reilly Virgil view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Clifford Norman view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Curtis John Lview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Roots George view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Gorfain Arthur view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Arthur Gorfain was born at Sydney in 1912 and educated at Tamworth and Quirindi. He spent the first few years of his working life in country movie theatres where he learned the first rudiments of syndication, noting how films went from town to town making money for the distributor and the producer. Gorfain went to Sydney in 1933 and worked for seven years in the offices of Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer, booking films all over the country. He joined the Air Force in 1940 and emerged as a Flying Officer. Late in 1945 he started Press Feature Service Pty Ltd, selling crosswords, columns, short stories, photo stories and comics. He travelled overseas and collected a number of agencies - The Daily Express, The Daily Mail, London Punch, Curtis Brown - and became the Australian representative for many overseas firms.

  In the early ’sixties Gorfain syndicated Bob Raymond’s very successful Frontiers of Science which appeared all over Australia, in Europe, South America, and in 120 US newspapers. Initially drawn by Andrea Bresciani, the feature started as a normal comic strip but within weeks adopted the illustrated text-book format, which takes it outside of the concern of this book. Press Feature Service employed George Roots, John Curtis, Royce Bradford and other artists as well as handling freelance material by Stan Pitt and ‘Camac’. It was for this syndicate that Roots created his Wilbur strip which ran in a number of papers, including the Brisbane Telegraph, as well as appearing in comic books. Bradford devised Cole Steele as a newspaper adventure strip but had to be contented to see it published as a comic book by Wollumbin Press, who also published Fredric Bates’ Speck Ryan Adventure Comic. After Silver Jacket, Gorfain continued in the syndication business until 1963 when he sold the company to Alan Foley Pty Ltd - the company which handles the overseas distribution of Air Hawk. Gorfain went into the motel business where he built up a large chain of motels around the country.’ etc
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Raymond Bob view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bresciani Andrea view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Possibly the only new comic of the ’sixties was the K. G. Murray version of Smoky Dawson, which ran for about a year. Albert De Vine had originally drawn Smoky Dawson as a daily strip for the Sydney Sun in the late ’fifties and, when the comic finished, transferred the character to the comic books. Later issues were drawn by Andrea Bresciani who had come from Italy, where he had gained a reputation for his work on the Tony Falco comic in 1948-9.

Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bradford Royce view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bates Fredricview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Cleland Larry Sview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
English Hal view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Bramley Maurice view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
‘Most of the covers were the work of Maurice Bramley who also contributed filler comics to the war and western titles. A former staff artist with Associated Press, Bramley was a meticulous draftsman whose detailed pen work and realistic drawings were a cut above many of the illustrators in the field. In February 1958, Horwitz published the first Carter Brown Comics drawn by C. E. Drury. Ranging between 56 and 64 pages and selling for 2s. the comics were adaptations of the popular Carter Brown novels which were also published by Horwitz. Six of these novels were banned in Queensland in 1960 and another in 1961. At a time when reprint comics contained 100 pages for 2sCarter Brown Comics didn’t last very long despite being well-illustrated. Another of their novel adaptations, Marc Brody, had a similar fate. The comic was the work of Royce Bradford who also drew The Cloak stories for Tales of Mystery Comics.

  Early in 1959, John Dixon created The Phantom Commando series for Horwitz but had to abandon the character after three issues to concentrate on Air Hawk. With Dixon’s blessings the comic was taken over by Bramley who continued to draw it on an irregular schedule until 1965. Bramley soon took the character away from the adventure style background conceived by Dixon and brought the comic into line with the real-life wars and battles being featured in other Horwitz war comics. Again, Bramley excelled with his pen portraits of prominent war personalities.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Cubi Aview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Edwards Tony view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations. ‘Strange Tales was a tabloid-size comic released in December 1974 which featured as its leading character an amoral pig called Captain Goodvibes. Drawn by Tony Edwards, the grass-smoking, antiestablishment Good vibes had first appeared in a surfing magazine, Tracks, in 1973 and had become something of a cult figure, Although Goodvibes contained considerably more lines and cross hatching than the American Wonder Warthog, it was very much from the same mould as Gilbert Shelton’s character.’
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Ryan Jonview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Brosnan John of Perth view full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Collier Chris of Brisbaneview full entry
Reference: see Panel by panel : a history of Australian comics / John Ryan. Includes bibliographical references (page 216) and index and more than 350 b/w illustrations.
Full contents •
part one. Newspaper strips
• 1. The harbingers
• 2. Here comes the comics
• 3. The dreaded Sindy Kate
• 4. At war and peace
• 5. The slow decline
• 6. The lean years
• 7. On the move again?
• 8. Spreading the good word
part two. Comic books
• 9. The early days
• 10. A captive market
• 11. The post-war boom
• 12. The uptight 'fifties
• 13. Running hard to stand still.
Publishing details: Stanmore, New South Wales : Cassell Australia, 1979, hc, dw, 223 numbered leaves : illustrations
Trioview full entry
Reference: Trio : a book of poems / by Kenneth Slessor, Harley Matthews and Colin Simpson ; with drawings and designs by Raymond Lindsay, William E. Pidgeon, James E. Flett, George Finey and a map by James Emery
Publishing details: Sunnybrook Press, 1931, [56] p. : ill., map
Ref: 1000
Lindsay Raymond view full entry
Reference: see Trio : a book of poems / by Kenneth Slessor, Harley Matthews and Colin Simpson ; with drawings and designs by Raymond Lindsay, William E. Pidgeon, James E. Flett, George Finey and a map by James Emery
Publishing details: Sunnybrook Press, 1931, [56] p. : ill., map
Pidgeon William Eview full entry
Reference: see Trio : a book of poems / by Kenneth Slessor, Harley Matthews and Colin Simpson ; with drawings and designs by Raymond Lindsay, William E. Pidgeon, James E. Flett, George Finey and a map by James Emery
Publishing details: Sunnybrook Press, 1931, [56] p. : ill., map
Flett James Eview full entry
Reference: see Trio : a book of poems / by Kenneth Slessor, Harley Matthews and Colin Simpson ; with drawings and designs by Raymond Lindsay, William E. Pidgeon, James E. Flett, George Finey and a map by James Emery
Publishing details: Sunnybrook Press, 1931, [56] p. : ill., map
Finey George view full entry
Reference: see Trio : a book of poems / by Kenneth Slessor, Harley Matthews and Colin Simpson ; with drawings and designs by Raymond Lindsay, William E. Pidgeon, James E. Flett, George Finey and a map by James Emery
Publishing details: Sunnybrook Press, 1931, [56] p. : ill., map
Emery James view full entry
Reference: see Trio : a book of poems / by Kenneth Slessor, Harley Matthews and Colin Simpson ; with drawings and designs by Raymond Lindsay, William E. Pidgeon, James E. Flett, George Finey and a map by James Emery
Publishing details: Sunnybrook Press, 1931, [56] p. : ill., map
Attorney-General of New Barataria Theview full entry
Reference: The Attorney-General of New Barataria / by Daniel Henry Deniehy ; introduction and biographical notes by William B. Dalley ; woodcuts designed and engraved by Lionel Lindsay
Publishing details: Sydney : Sunnybrook Press, 1932 
53 p. : ill.
Ref: 1000
Lindsay Lionelview full entry
Reference: see The Attorney-General of New Barataria / by Daniel Henry Deniehy ; introduction and biographical notes by William B. Dalley ; woodcuts designed and engraved by Lionel Lindsay
Publishing details: Sydney : Sunnybrook Press, 1932 
53 p. : ill.
Cottrell Edna cover illustrationview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Rowe S V lecturerview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Lyons J T lecturerview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Townley F C printerview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Seligson & Clare inkmakersview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Cowan Alex & Son paper supplierview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Moir Alexander & Co paper supplierview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Ball B J paper supplierview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Gordon & Gotch paper supplierview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Edwards Dunlop & Co paper supplierview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Penfolds W C & Co paper supplierview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Roughley Nancy - greeting card designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Hoff Rayner - Labour winning design Prix de rome 1922 and Renascence exhibited at R Aview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Morrison Joan - Odyssey Homer a frontispiece and an illustrationview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Mallinson M a title page for Rubaiyat by Omar Khayamview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Macdonnell Nan booklet coverview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
White Coral 2 sketches for programme covers and 4 covers of modern design and book coverview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Hoff Rayner - Hercules Deianira and Achelous exh at RA and Portrait Bustview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Andrews Mabel a cover design and 3 drawingsview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Grange Emily travel booklet coverview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Pritchard Marjorie fashion sketch and 2 illustrationsview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Bashford Dorothy garden vase on bronze and 2 illustrationsview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Bashford Dorothy garden vase on bronze and 2 illustrationsview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Remarque Erich book cover designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
O’Harris Pat sketchview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Stephen M sketch The Rain Dwarfview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Collins Kathleen poster design cigarette advertisementview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Schmidt Ellen greeting card designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Williams Gwynneth calendar design view full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Friedenson Jeanne greeting card designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Friedenson Jeanne greeting card designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Gordon Georgina show card designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Stone Gwen greeting card designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Stone Gwen greeting card design Aboriginal motifview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Chambers Betty chocolate box top designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Tait Margret cover design for a catalogue and a calendar designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Barton Janet greeting card designview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Robb J cover design for Art Students Exhibitionview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Morris E R photographic platesview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Martin Jan view full entry
Reference: Jan Martin sketchbook
Publishing details: Surrey Hills, Vic. : J. Martin and B. Chandler, 2003 
102 p. : ill. (some col.)
Ref: 1000
Theory and Elements of Architectureview full entry
Reference: Theory and Elements of Architecture by A. H. Martin [advertised in Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.(Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Angus and Robinson, 1929
Ref: 1000
Martin A Hview full entry
Reference: see Theory and Elements of Architecture by A. H. Martin [advertised in Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.(Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Angus and Robinson, 1929
architectureview full entry
Reference: see Theory and Elements of Architecture by A. H. Martin [advertised in Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.(Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Angus and Robinson, 1929
van Raalte Henry advertisement for Anthony Horderns exhibitionview full entry
Reference: see Art and Printing - A Selection of Students’ Work from the Art and Printing Depts. of the Sydney Technical College. Produced by E. Shea, Head Teacher of Letterpress Printing, Lecturers in Charge S. V. Rowe & J. T. Lyons. (Includes illustrations of examples of works by students at the Art and Printing Departments at Sydney Technical College. This book was produced by Ernest Shea before the creation of his Sunnybrook Press.)
Publishing details: Sydney Technical College, 1929, [56] leaves : ill. (some col.), large
quarto, wrappers. Limited ed. of 600 copies.
Fitzgerald Paul Desmondview full entry
Reference: see eBay listing Apil 23, 2021:
Paul Desmond Fitzgerald 1922- 2017
Australian Portrait Artist
The surgeon WW2
This is a beautifully executed painting
A Catholic, Fitzgerald was educated at Xavier College in Melbourne (1933–1939) and studied for five years at the National Gallery School (1940–43 and 1946–47), interrupted for three and a half years in the Army during World War II (1943–46)
When he was painting away from his studio in Melbourne, he usually lived with the subjects of his portraiture. He lived and painted overseas on commissioned portraits twice each year since 1958 including America, Canada, England, Scotland, Ireland, Jersey, France, Italy, Germany, Spain, Malaysia, Singapore, Hong Kong, Hawaii and Bermuda. He also painted throughout Australia.
Fitzgerald was a finalist for the Archibald Prize for portraiture on multiple occasions including 1958 (with a portrait of Justice Robert Monahan), in 1962 (with portraits of each of Sir Reg Ansett and Sir Robert Menzies), and in 1972 (with a portrait of Sir Henry Bolte).
In 1997 Fitzgerald was appointed a Member of the Order of Australia and a Knight of Malta. He founded the Australian Guild of Realist Artists, where he was a Life Member of the Council, and was president for seven years. Fitzgerald was a member of "Portraits Incorporated" in America, is a trustee of the A.M.E. Bale Travelling Scholarship and Art Prize, and produced the art book Australian Realist and Impressionist Artists, donating the profits to charity
Fitzgerald's work was prolific and the following are known notable portraits by the artist
Queen Elizabeth II in 1963,] in 1978 being the only official portrait in her Silver Jubilee year, and one other portrait in 1967.
Prince Philip, Duke of Edinburgh in 1976, plus one other portrait in 1974.
Charles, Prince of Wales, two portraits, 1978.
Pope John XXIII painted in The Vatican in 1963.
The Duke of Kent, two portraits, in 1978 and 2000.
Sir William Heseltine, Private Secretary to Queen Elizabeth II.
Five portraits of the Malaysian Royal Family
Two identical 6 feet (1.8 m) portraits of Sharafuddin Idris Shah -The Raja Muda of Selangor (Crown Prince of Malaysia), son of the Sultan of Selangor
Prince Ludwig (nephew of Prince Philip) and Princess Von Baden and family (Germany)
Three Cardinals, including Cardinal James Knox, four Archbishops including Daniel Mannix, and two Bishops
Angelo de Mojana di Cologna – 77th Prince Grand Master of the Knights of Malta and Count Da Larocca – Knight of Malta
The Duke of Westminster; a Marquess; three Earls; two Viscounts; four Barons
SEE LINK - https://www.abc.net.au/news/2017-06-26/melbourne-painter-paul-fitzgerald-dies-at-the-age-of-94/8652646
Details
Size framed (approx) 25 x 21 inches
Size canvas (approx) 16 x 20 inches
Oil on canvas
Signed
Bergner Yosl 1920-2017view full entry
Reference: Yosl Bergner (1920-2017)- A Selling Retrospective
Artvisory are proud to present a significant selling exhibition of works by the famous Australian-Israeli artist Yosl Bergner. The exhibition comprises important oil paintings from the 1960's through to fine later period works, a wonderful collection of limited edition bronzes and fine graphics.
The launch night is  Wednesday 5 May and The exhibition continues Wednesday to Saturday 11am-5pm until 21 May, 2021.
Publishing details: Artvisory Galleries, South Yarra, 2021.
Ref: 1000
Stokes Everton (Evie)sculptorview full entry
Reference: see Nora Heysen by Lou Klepac [Everton or Evie Stokes was a sculptor from Adelaide. She joined Nora Heysen in Europe and they travelled together].
Publishing details: Beagle Press, 1989 
80 p. : chiefly col. ill. ; 32 cm. Includes bibliography
Dawson David b1961view full entry
Reference: see lot 174, Wednesday 26 May, 2021, Roseberys, London,

David Dawson, Australian b.1960- Northern Territories, Australia; acrylic on two panels, 24.6x36.5cm Provenance: The Solomon Gallery, London; Private Collection, London 29.5x41.5x2.1cm(including frame) Held in a shared silvered wooden frame of plain form with some scuff marks to the surface. The two panels abut each other and appear to be adhered to a backing board. They have not been examined out of the frame. The grain and the uneven edges of the wood are evident in the paint. Particularly where the two panels are connected. There are marks and substances on the surface, but they all appear to be since creation and most likely occurred when the surface was wet, so one can presume it was the artist's hand. Overall the piece appears to be in good condition.
Estimate 300 - 500 GBP


Damman Carl and F W 
view full entry
Reference: see lot 562 Nosbüsch & Stucke GmbH
May 13, 2021, 1:00 PM CET
Berlin, Germany. Ethnological photographic gallery of the various races of mankind. With 167 original photographic portraits on 12 plates. Vintage. Albumin prints. Assembled. London, Trübner, 1876. Title. 31 x 42 cm. Restored, blind-embossed original canvas (bumped and somewhat scraped).
Rarissimum of the early ethnological photography, here in the English-language edition, which was finished by his brother after C. Damman's death in 1874. - C. Damman was a Hamburg photographer who began to reproduce ethnological photos from the Hamburg Goddefroy Museum in the early 1870s for the Berlin Society for Anthropology. A large part of these recordings then appeared in book form in the years 1872-74 in a German edition under the title "Anthropological-Ethnological Album in Photographs". The photographer of the original photos can only be identified occasionally, for example some of the photos of Australian ethnic groups were taken by Thomas Washbourne, Daniel Marquis and Joseph Wilder. The album is divided into regions: German or Germanic types, Romance types, Slavic types, locals from Persia, from Arab countries, from India, China, Japan, Australia, America, Oceania etc. The format of the recordings is mainly CDV. - Liner partly browned in the margin, a little darkened and stained, the prints only occasionally a little pale and stained, all in all a good copy of this rare work.

Washbourne Thomas photographerview full entry
Reference: see lot 562 Nosbüsch & Stucke GmbH
May 13, 2021, 1:00 PM CET
Berlin, Germany. Ethnological photographic gallery of the various races of mankind. With 167 original photographic portraits on 12 plates. Vintage. Albumin prints. Assembled. London, Trübner, 1876. Title. 31 x 42 cm. Restored, blind-embossed original canvas (bumped and somewhat scraped).
Rarissimum of the early ethnological photography, here in the English-language edition, which was finished by his brother after C. Damman's death in 1874. - C. Damman was a Hamburg photographer who began to reproduce ethnological photos from the Hamburg Goddefroy Museum in the early 1870s for the Berlin Society for Anthropology. A large part of these recordings then appeared in book form in the years 1872-74 in a German edition under the title "Anthropological-Ethnological Album in Photographs". The photographer of the original photos can only be identified occasionally, for example some of the photos of Australian ethnic groups were taken by Thomas Washbourne, Daniel Marquis and Joseph Wilder. The album is divided into regions: German or Germanic types, Romance types, Slavic types, locals from Persia, from Arab countries, from India, China, Japan, Australia, America, Oceania etc. The format of the recordings is mainly CDV. - Liner partly browned in the margin, a little darkened and stained, the prints only occasionally a little pale and stained, all in all a good copy of this rare work.

Marquis Daniel photographerview full entry
Reference: see lot 562 Nosbüsch & Stucke GmbH
May 13, 2021, 1:00 PM CET
Berlin, Germany. Ethnological photographic gallery of the various races of mankind. With 167 original photographic portraits on 12 plates. Vintage. Albumin prints. Assembled. London, Trübner, 1876. Title. 31 x 42 cm. Restored, blind-embossed original canvas (bumped and somewhat scraped).
Rarissimum of the early ethnological photography, here in the English-language edition, which was finished by his brother after C. Damman's death in 1874. - C. Damman was a Hamburg photographer who began to reproduce ethnological photos from the Hamburg Goddefroy Museum in the early 1870s for the Berlin Society for Anthropology. A large part of these recordings then appeared in book form in the years 1872-74 in a German edition under the title "Anthropological-Ethnological Album in Photographs". The photographer of the original photos can only be identified occasionally, for example some of the photos of Australian ethnic groups were taken by Thomas Washbourne, Daniel Marquis and Joseph Wilder. The album is divided into regions: German or Germanic types, Romance types, Slavic types, locals from Persia, from Arab countries, from India, China, Japan, Australia, America, Oceania etc. The format of the recordings is mainly CDV. - Liner partly browned in the margin, a little darkened and stained, the prints only occasionally a little pale and stained, all in all a good copy of this rare work.

Wilder Joseph photographerview full entry
Reference: see lot 562 Nosbüsch & Stucke GmbH
May 13, 2021, 1:00 PM CET
Berlin, Germany. Ethnological photographic gallery of the various races of mankind. With 167 original photographic portraits on 12 plates. Vintage. Albumin prints. Assembled. London, Trübner, 1876. Title. 31 x 42 cm. Restored, blind-embossed original canvas (bumped and somewhat scraped).
Rarissimum of the early ethnological photography, here in the English-language edition, which was finished by his brother after C. Damman's death in 1874. - C. Damman was a Hamburg photographer who began to reproduce ethnological photos from the Hamburg Goddefroy Museum in the early 1870s for the Berlin Society for Anthropology. A large part of these recordings then appeared in book form in the years 1872-74 in a German edition under the title "Anthropological-Ethnological Album in Photographs". The photographer of the original photos can only be identified occasionally, for example some of the photos of Australian ethnic groups were taken by Thomas Washbourne, Daniel Marquis and Joseph Wilder. The album is divided into regions: German or Germanic types, Romance types, Slavic types, locals from Persia, from Arab countries, from India, China, Japan, Australia, America, Oceania etc. The format of the recordings is mainly CDV. - Liner partly browned in the margin, a little darkened and stained, the prints only occasionally a little pale and stained, all in all a good copy of this rare work.

Fiveash Tina b1970view full entry
Reference: see Roseberys
May 26, 2021, 2:00 PM BST
West Norwood, United Kingdom
lot 164: Tina Fiveash, Australian b.1970- Twilight Lovers, 1994; chromogenic print, signed and dated 1994 lower right, titled lower center, and number 9/10 lower left, 44.5x56cm Provenance: Whitford Fine Art, London, where purchased by the present owner.

This work is in a wooden white glazed frame- there are some minor marks to the frame. 69x79.2cm(frame) The work has not been examined out of the frame, it may or may not be stuck down. The work appears to be in very good condition.

Also lots 165 and 166
Newton June 1923-2021view full entry
Reference: obituary in Sydney Morning Herald 29.4.2021, p29. June Newton was the wife of and collaborator with Helmut Newton
Publishing details: SMH 29 April, 2021, p29
Ref: 140
Newton Helmutview full entry
Reference: see June Newton obituary in Sydney Morning Herald 29.4.2021, p29. June Newton was the wife of Helmut Newton
Publishing details: SMH 29 April, 2021, p29
Jesman Boleslaw view full entry
Reference: Boleslaw Jesman, Artist has shown at
Casey Art Show 2013
Mornington Art Exhibition 2013
Gallery 247, Melbourne.
Jesman Boleslaw view full entry
Reference: see Casey Art Show exhibition, 2013:
CURRICULUM VITAE
Boleslaw Jesman
Born in Poland
Hobby Artist from 2000
Membership
2004 - Malvern Artists’ Society – Malvern
2008 - Polish Art Foundation
Group Exhibitions
2004 - 2012 - Malvern Artists’ Society Malvern
2008 - 30 BY 30n"Around Us" A small format art exhibition - Polish Art Foundation -Steps Gallery  - Carlton
2009 - Strathdon Community’s 6th Annual Art Exhibition Forest Hill
2009 - 9X5 Walker St Gallery Dandenong
2010 -  Polish Art Foundation -Steps Gallery Carlton
2011 - 9X5 Walker St Gallery -Dandenong
2011 - Camberwell Rotary Art Show
2012 - Camberwell Rotary Art Show
2012-June - Chelsea Rotary Art Show
Solo Exhibition
2012 -  Malvern Artists, Society Gallery Malvern
 Miscellaneous Arts Related Activities\
2000 – 2011 attended various art workshops:
The Centre of Adults Education – Melbourne - Malvern Artists’ Society Art Workshops

- Oil and Watercolour Painting– Endeavour Hills
Awards
2006 - Highly Commended Modern/Abstract ‘Summer’ – oil - Malvern Artists’ Society
2010 - Highly Commended ‘Summer Blossoms’ – pastel - Malvern Artists’ Society

2010 - Best Still Life/Floral ‘Paradise’ – pastel – Spring Exhibition, Malvern Artists’ Society
2010 - Highly Commended -- Malvern Artists’ Society
Publishing details: http://caseyartshow.snapdev.com.au/boleslaw-jesman
Van Eeden Claudia view full entry
Reference: Claudia Van Eeden – Coo-ee! [’Coo-ee! is a celebration of a land that is both beautiful and brutal, hardy and vulnerable. In her first book with Perimeter Editions, young Melbourne artist Claudia Van Eeden crafts a vibrantly optimistic ode to the landscape, iconography and visual language of Australia. Refreshing in its palette and tenor, Coo-ee! acts as a travel diary of sorts, rendering the scenic environment, weather, passersby and native flora and fauna in loose, playful brushstrokes. Van Eeden embraces Australiana in a way that balances humour with sincerity, avoiding cultural cringe at every turn. Featuring an original painting for every page – including the covers, title page and colophon – and made with found gouache paints, Coo-ee! extends beyond kitsch to rest somewhere closer to that of naïve art. Before suspicion, before cynicism, Van Eeden’s paintings shimmer with love and care.’]
Publishing details: Perimeter Editions, 86 pages, 26 x 19.5cm, perfect bound, softcover.
Ref: 1000
Trower Dayne view full entry
Reference: Ground Form by Dayne Trower. This is Trower's third series, and in with his earlier work, topography is as much a focus as architecture. Trower's sculptures depict deep, three-dimensional ground planes, a constant in which volumes and details are traced, subtracted and added. While each "ground form" is a foundation on which a stage of the project is depicted, each is itself constructed.
[’In this third solo exhibition at fortyfive downstairs, Melbourne architect Dayne Trowner continues his meticulous, archaeological study into the processes behind the construction of our built environment. In ‘Ground Form’ Trowner documents the precise, methodical modification of the existing ground plane in the form of 20, individually-constructed, small-scale plywood models which record the reconfiguration of a site’s natural topography in preparation for built form.
Working off one elongated coastal site,  Trowner’s sculptures are an examination of the underlying hierarchy in the architectural process, exploring architectural foundations as geological alterations to the boundary zone where natural ground first encounters the built environment.’]
Publishing details: William Stout Architectural Books, 2014
Ref: 1000
Bunyan Marcus view full entry
Reference: see website: https://artblart.com
‘Dr Marcus Bunyan is an Australian artist and writer. His art work explores the boundaries of identity and place. He writes Art Blart, a photographic archive and form of cultural memory, which posts mainly photography exhibitions from around the world. He holds a Dr of Philosophy from RMIT University, Melbourne, a Master of Arts (Fine Art Photography) from RMIT University, and a Master of Art Curatorship from the University of Melbourne.
Art Blart - Dr Marcus Bunyanview full entry
Reference: see website: https://artblart.com
‘Dr Marcus Bunyan is an Australian artist and writer. His art work explores the boundaries of identity and place. He writes Art Blart, a photographic archive and form of cultural memory, which posts mainly photography exhibitions from around the world. He holds a Dr of Philosophy from RMIT University, Melbourne, a Master of Arts (Fine Art Photography) from RMIT University, and a Master of Art Curatorship from the University of Melbourne.
Thomas Davidview full entry
Reference: David Thomas : Colour. Time.: Catalogue of Exhibition Held at Nellie Castan Gallery, Melbourne, 2 April - 2 May 2009. By Olivia Poloni. [’A composite of paintings and photopaintings, which draw the world, painting and viewer into a complex dynamic. A photographed real space and an expanding undefinable painting space (the non-figurative form) confront each other, resulting in a coexistence of various models of space, a coexistence and entanglement of inconsistent things. ‘]
Publishing details: Nellie Castan Gallery, 2009, 96pp. Paperback + CD-ROM

Ref: 1000
Porter Louisview full entry
Reference: Louis Porter - Conflict Resolution.
[’Finally available in Australia, Louis Porter's Conflict Resolution might be described as a series of typologies. The project is part of Porter's wider archive, which tracks fragments, markers and traces of minor suburban conflict – the kind that can be unearthed amid the streets, buildings, vehicles and detritus of any modern town or city. The book offers a very different vantage on conflict, considering its cumulative effects on the psyche of place. Published by Porter's own Twenty Shelves imprint (Melbourne).’]

Publishing details: Twenty Shelves, 164 pages, softcover,
Ref: 1000
Popperwell Georgeview full entry
Reference: George Popperwell ~ Delayed Voyage (Contemporary Art Centre of South Australia)
Publishing details: The Contemporary Art Centre of South Australia, 2009, pb.
Ref: 1000
Gilligan Minna view full entry
Reference: Time After Time - Flashback Fashion for Modern-Day Play. [’In Time After Time, fashion icon Minna Gilligan imparts her wisdom and penchant for mixing and matching fashion, and details contemporary ways to wear vintage things in combination with current new items of clothing. Minna s philosophy is that dressing has no rules or regulations other than what you impose on yourself, and that an outfit s greatest goal is to bring you joy and make you feel good. She fills the pages with snapshots of her own inspiration and art and details how to combine items plucked from different time periods with accessories, buttons, collar details, shoes, hats, and glasses. Minna offers the tools for how to shop from thrift shops to the internet to the occasional high-end store, with examples of looks she puts together from her own finds for a range of occasions. Time After Time is a color riot that is as beautiful as it is useful."

About the Author

Minna Gilligan is a 24-year-old artist and illustrator who works primarily in painting, drawing, and collage, with exhibitions in galleries around the world. Minna displays her passion for fashion collecting through her blog and Instagram (40,000+ followers), and illustrates and writes for Tavi Gevinson s New York based online magazine, "ROOKIE, " while also collaborating with London-based photographer Elle Hardwick and Toronto-based photographer Petra Collins."’]
Publishing details: 2015
Ref: 1000
Freedman Haroldview full entry
Reference: Harold Freedman The Big Picture Hardcover By Gavin Fry, David Freedman & David Jack. [’Harold Freedman was an artist of enormous drive, ambition and achievement. He was never content to mark time, always ready to turn his hand to new challenges and he left his mark on the nation in many places.

Harold worked as a fine artist, an illustrator, printmaker, designer and muralist, all the while drawing on a deep well of traditional training and a determination to bring art and the creative spirit to the widest possible audience. He was a democrat at heart, seeing art as being for the people, the man and the woman in the street who had the right to live in a community where they could see and experience art on a daily basis.

While best known for his series of painted and mosaic murals, the largest ever created in Australia, he was also an influential teacher, an official wart artist and book designer.

About the Authors

Gavin Fry is an artist, writer, publisher and museum professional.

David Freedman, MBBS, BSc (Med), FRACS, has recently retired after 42 years working as a general surgeon in remote and regional centres in Australia and overseas.

David Jack is Director of the Melbourne Mural Studio.’]
[’Harold Freedman worked across a dazzling range of projects ,working as a Cartoonist ,Official War Artist ,book designer and illustrator, poster artist, teacher, print maker and most importantly as Australias foremost mural artist. Whilst Freedman’s work is concentrated in his home city of Melbourne, his work as the Senior War Artist for the RAAF and his ground breaking aircraft mural for the Australian War Memorial gave his art a national stature. 
This handsome 208 page hardback book, which includes two striking gatefolds, each nearly a meter wide, of murals completed during his tenure of the position of Victorian State Artist is now available...’]
Publishing details: David Freedman, 2019, 200pp
Ref: 1009
Borland Pollyview full entry
Reference: Morph. [’Published to coincide with her major exhibition at the National Gallery of Victoria (NGV) in Melbourne, Polly Borland’s new book Morph offers an incisive new vantage on the celebrated Australian-born, Los Angeles-based photographer’s explorations of anthropomorphic soft-sculpture and abstracted portraiture. The new series of works – which were made in collaboration with model Sibylla Phipps, who also contributes a compelling psychoanalytic text to the book – serves as a dramatic, almost surrealistic expansion of Borland’s visual language, with her attention to colour and reimagining of form coming to the fore. At once tender and troubling, the works that populate Morph, the artist’s second book for Perimeter Editions, are poignantly human and pointedly not. 

Polly Borland is one of Australia’s foremost photographic artists. Famed for her early editorial work and portraiture – which saw her photograph the likes of Queen Elizabeth II, Nick Cave, Donald Trump, Susan Sontag, Monica Lewinsky and Cate Blanchett for a host of clients such as The Guardian, The New York Times and The New Yorker – her art practice has seen her exhibit widely in Australia, the UK, Europe and the United States, including the major exhibition Polyverse at the National Gallery of Victoria, Melbourne, in late 2018. Her books include The Babies (2000), Bunny (2008), Smudge (2010) and YOU (Perimeter Editions, 2013). ’]
Publishing details: Perimeter Editions, 2018 (?)80 pages + 12-page insert, 29 x 22 cm, exposed bind, softcover,
Ref: 1000
Armidale ‘42view full entry
Reference: Armidale ‘42 - Memory and Imagination 
A collaboration between Col Madigan (survivor), Jan Senbergs (artist) and Don Watson (historian)
[’A Bendigo Art Gallery Travelling Exhibition Sponsored by the Pratt Foundation through the Australia Foundation for Culture and the Humanities
On 1 December 1942, HMAS Armidale succumbed to air attack and sank into the depths of the Timor Trench with the loss of 100 lives. The story of the dire plight of the survivors has entered the public annals of naval history only relatively recently. Armidale ‘42: Memory and Imagination, commemorates this story of bravery and endurance.
The artist, Jan Senbergs, who has frequently interpreted Australian history through series of works, created The Armidale Drawings in collaboration with one of the survivors, the architect Colin Madigan (whose firm Edwards, Madigan, Torzillo & Briggs Pty Ltd designed the National Gallery of Australia and the High Court of Australia).
Madigan and Senbergs met in the 1970s while Senbergs was working on the High Court mural. Over the years they remained in contact, but it was not until 1996, when Madigan saw Senbergs painting The swimmer, that he spoke of his ordeal and the sinking of the Armidale. Senbergs reflects:
Hee stared for a while, looking carefully at the painting,then turned to me and said: ‘You know, I was in the water like that once.'
Survivors of the sinking of HMAS Armidale were thrown into the Arafura Sea. Many were badly injured and covered in oil. Under a hail of gunfire they bound a raft together from floating remains of the wreck. Battling sharks and sea snakes, they hauled the ship’s lifeboat onto the raft and repaired it with canvas. In an attempt to maximise longevity they decided to split up, some taking to the lifeboat while others remained Ofl the raft. Eight days later the lifeboat and its complement were found by the RAAF 27 survivors and two dead men. No trace of the men on the raft was ever found.
The beautifully illustrated book accompanying the exhibition contains Col Madigan’s recollections and his own images drawn from memory, and reproduces the series of pastel and acrylic wash drawings by Senbergs which make up the exhibition. An essay by Don Watson places the sinking of the Armidale and subsequent events in an historical context aligned with current understanding of the issues.
 ’]
Publishing details: Macmillan, 2000 
92 p. : ill., (some col.)
Ref: 1000
Madigan Col view full entry
Reference: see Armidale ‘42 - Memory and Imagination 
A collaboration between Col Madigan (survivor), Jan Senbergs (artist) and Don Watson (historian)
[’A Bendigo Art Gallery Travelling Exhibition Sponsored by the Pratt Foundation through the Australia Foundation for Culture and the Humanities
On 1 December 1942, HMAS Armidale succumbed to air attack and sank into the depths of the Timor Trench with the loss of 100 lives. The story of the dire plight of the survivors has entered the public annals of naval history only relatively recently. Armidale ‘42: Memory and Imagination, commemorates this story of bravery and endurance.
The artist, Jan Senbergs, who has frequently interpreted Australian history through series of works, created The Armidale Drawings in collaboration with one of the survivors, the architect Colin Madigan (whose firm Edwards, Madigan, Torzillo & Briggs Pty Ltd designed the National Gallery of Australia and the High Court of Australia).
Madigan and Senbergs met in the 1970s while Senbergs was working on the High Court mural. Over the years they remained in contact, but it was not until 1996, when Madigan saw Senbergs painting The swimmer, that he spoke of his ordeal and the sinking of the Armidale. Senbergs reflects:
Hee stared for a while, looking carefully at the painting,then turned to me and said: ‘You know, I was in the water like that once.'
Survivors of the sinking of HMAS Armidale were thrown into the Arafura Sea. Many were badly injured and covered in oil. Under a hail of gunfire they bound a raft together from floating remains of the wreck. Battling sharks and sea snakes, they hauled the ship’s lifeboat onto the raft and repaired it with canvas. In an attempt to maximise longevity they decided to split up, some taking to the lifeboat while others remained Ofl the raft. Eight days later the lifeboat and its complement were found by the RAAF 27 survivors and two dead men. No trace of the men on the raft was ever found.
The beautifully illustrated book accompanying the exhibition contains Col Madigan’s recollections and his own images drawn from memory, and reproduces the series of pastel and acrylic wash drawings by Senbergs which make up the exhibition. An essay by Don Watson places the sinking of the Armidale and subsequent events in an historical context aligned with current understanding of the issues.
 ’]
Publishing details: Macmillan, 2000 
92 p. : ill., (some col.)
Senbergs Jan view full entry
Reference: see Armidale ‘42 - Memory and Imagination 
A collaboration between Col Madigan (survivor), Jan Senbergs (artist) and Don Watson (historian)
[’A Bendigo Art Gallery Travelling Exhibition Sponsored by the Pratt Foundation through the Australia Foundation for Culture and the Humanities
On 1 December 1942, HMAS Armidale succumbed to air attack and sank into the depths of the Timor Trench with the loss of 100 lives. The story of the dire plight of the survivors has entered the public annals of naval history only relatively recently. Armidale ‘42: Memory and Imagination, commemorates this story of bravery and endurance.
The artist, Jan Senbergs, who has frequently interpreted Australian history through series of works, created The Armidale Drawings in collaboration with one of the survivors, the architect Colin Madigan (whose firm Edwards, Madigan, Torzillo & Briggs Pty Ltd designed the National Gallery of Australia and the High Court of Australia).
Madigan and Senbergs met in the 1970s while Senbergs was working on the High Court mural. Over the years they remained in contact, but it was not until 1996, when Madigan saw Senbergs painting The swimmer, that he spoke of his ordeal and the sinking of the Armidale. Senbergs reflects:
Hee stared for a while, looking carefully at the painting,then turned to me and said: ‘You know, I was in the water like that once.'
Survivors of the sinking of HMAS Armidale were thrown into the Arafura Sea. Many were badly injured and covered in oil. Under a hail of gunfire they bound a raft together from floating remains of the wreck. Battling sharks and sea snakes, they hauled the ship’s lifeboat onto the raft and repaired it with canvas. In an attempt to maximise longevity they decided to split up, some taking to the lifeboat while others remained Ofl the raft. Eight days later the lifeboat and its complement were found by the RAAF 27 survivors and two dead men. No trace of the men on the raft was ever found.
The beautifully illustrated book accompanying the exhibition contains Col Madigan’s recollections and his own images drawn from memory, and reproduces the series of pastel and acrylic wash drawings by Senbergs which make up the exhibition. An essay by Don Watson places the sinking of the Armidale and subsequent events in an historical context aligned with current understanding of the issues.
 ’]
Publishing details: Macmillan, 2000 
92 p. : ill., (some col.)
Zaadstra Pieterview full entry
Reference: The artist & the fly fisher / Pieter Zaadstra
Publishing details: Pieter Zaadstra Art Studio, c2007 
1 v. : col. ill., col. port. Certified limited edition of 500.
Ref: 1000
king of the accordion Theview full entry
Reference: The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Ref: 1000
Archer Suzanneview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Bancroft Bronwynview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Connor Kevinview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Fairburn Davidview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Gittoes Georgeview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Kuo Grahamview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Lester Kerrieview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Majzner Victorview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Thomson Annview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Varvaressos Vickiview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Walker John Rview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Winch Madeleineview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Zofrea Salvatoreview full entry
Reference: see The king of the accordion / the writer: Anna Maria Dell'oso ; the artists: Suzanne Archer ... [et al.] ; the curator: Joseph Eisenberg ; the exhibition manager: Belinda Cotton. Edited, designed and produced by Jospeh Eisenberg and Belinda Cotton.
"A New England Regional Art Museum touring exhibition"--Cover.
"A short story was commissioned, then thirteen artists were invited to respond"--Introd.
Publishing details: New England Regional Art Museum, 1995 
75 pages : 13 col. illustrations, portraits.
Melville Harden Sidney - Torres Strait canoe and 5 men and a wreck 1874view full entry
Reference: in collection of NGV purchased 2020: Melville Harden Sidney - Torres Strait canoe and 5 men and a wreck 1874
Clarke Daniel View of Warrnambool oil 1867view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the National Gallery of Victoria
Mouchette Berthe The Queen’s Bouquetview full entry
Reference: in the collection of the National Gallery of Victoria:
BERTHE MOUCHETTE
Born
1846 Forcalquier, Provence-Alpes-Côte d'Azur, France
Died
20 June 1928
Nationality
French
Lived/worked
worked in Australia 1881–(c. 1920)
Hollick Ruthview full entry
Reference: in the collection of the National Gallery of Victoria - numerous works
Rooney Robertview full entry
Reference: in the collection of the National Gallery of Victoria - numerous works, the bequest of Robert Rooney
Lissan Maisie c1935-c1998view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the National Gallery of Victoria
Smiler Badjingga Mona c1918-93view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the National Gallery of Victoria
McDonald Agnes Grant 1867-1941 portrait of Robert Hoddleview full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Hoddle Robertview full entry
Reference: a portrait of Robert Hoddle by Agnes Grant McDonald1867-1941 is in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Hofmann Reinhold Melbourne 1836 painted c1886view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Martin Max 1889-1965 glassworkers c1950 view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Challen Arthur Thomas 1911-64 portrait of Moira Madden 1937view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Madden Moira 1915-73 portrait by Arthur Thomas Challen 1937view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Webb Matthew William 1851-1924 portrait of Janet Russell 1890view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria (British artist)
Forthun Louise Toffee & Ice 2008view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Mackinnon William ‘Exit’ 2013view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Lloyd Tony ‘Skystone’ 2004view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Jones Shane Flemington Racecourse 2012view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Petyarre Josie Kunoth MCG 2007view full entry
Reference: in the collection of the State Library of Victoria
Kent Reidview full entry
Reference: see Davidsons Sale 147 Lot 90
REID KENT, O (Australian School)
'Era Beach, South Coast, NSW.'
Depression shacks
Woodcut 12/40
24x19.5cm
Estimate $100-200


Bird I or H or Aview full entry
Reference: see Douglas Stewart Fine Books, May 2021:
Pen and ink drawing, 210 x 242 mm, titled lower centre, signed lower right ‘I. Bird’ (?), pale foxing, early twentieth century frame.
A fine and detailed nineteenth century drawing of a great English thoroughbred and influential sire in Australian horseracing history, the sire of the great Carbine.
‘Musket (1867–1885) was an English-bred Thoroughbred racehorse and a Leading sire in Australia and New Zealand. He was sired by Toxophilite, his dam was a bay mare (1857) who was a half-sister to General Peel’s dam, by West Australian (winner of the 1853 British Triple Crown) from Brown Bess (1844) by Camel. Musket was inbred to Touchstone in the fourth generation (4×4). In England Musket won nine races including the Ascot Stakes before retiring to stud there where he only had limited patronage. In spite of this he managed to sire Petronel winner of the 2,000 Guineas and Brown Bess (1876) winner of the Doncaster Cup and Goodwood Stakes.
In December 1878 Musket was imported into Victoria by the Auckland Stud Company and then sent to Auckland, New Zealand the following month. Initially he was used here to cover “half-bred” mares to breed coach horses. He sired 28 stakeswinners which had 107 stakes wins … Musket is best remembered for siring the famous Carbine (great-great-grandsire of Nearco), Nordenfeldt, Trenton (a leading sire in Australasia and then exported), Martini-Henry and Hotchkiss, all top sires. Carbine in his day was considered one of the greatest horses in the world, whose feats included winning the 1890 Melbourne Cup with the impost of 10 st 5 lb in the record time of 3:28¼. The bloodlines of Musket including Carbine and Trenton, are still evident in many horses racing today. Musket had his portrait painted by the noted equine artist, Martin Stainforth and it was reproduced in Racehorses in Australia” – Wikipedia
MARCUSE Rudolf (1878-1940)view full entry
Reference: see Douglas Stewart Fine Books, May 2021:
Bronze bust of North Queensland-born and Sydney-raised indigenous soldier Douglas Grant, modelled while he was a German prisoner of war during World War One.
Berlin : Rotophoto. A. G., [1919]. Photogravure print, 202 x 139 mm, tipped on to its original mount of textured green card, with the title of the work ‘Australier’, the sculptor’s name ‘Rudolf Marcuse’, and publisher’s information all imprinted in gold beneath the image; originally part of a portfolio containing 37 loosely mounted photogravure-process photographs of Marcuse’s busts and statuettes, titled Völkertypen aus dem Weltkrieg (=Ethnic Types from the World War); in fine condition.
Indigenous Australian soldier Douglas Grant was one of many prisoners from diverse ethnic backgrounds who modelled for the renowned German sculptor Rudolf Marcuse in Wünsdorf prisoner-of-war camp, near Berlin, in 1918.
For a biography of Douglas Grant (with the detail about Marcuse’s bust being “in ebony” requiring correction) see the entry by Chris Clark in the ADB.
Ironically, as a Jew and therefore a member of a “non-Aryan race”, Marcuse would be forced to flee the Third Reich in 1936 because of his ethnicity. He died in London in 1940.
For a more recent online article on how Marcuse’s bronze sculpture of Douglas Grant was re-discovered, see Tom Murray and Hilary Howes, How we tracked down the only known sculpture of a WWI Indigenous soldier, in The Conversation, 5 June 2019.
We can trace no other examples of this photogravure of Marcuse’s bust of Douglas Grant in Australian collections.
 


Aboriginal stone pictures in eastern Arnhem Landview full entry
Reference: Aboriginal stone pictures in eastern Arnhem Land, by MACKNIGHT, C. C.; GRAY, W. J.

Publishing details: Canberra : Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1970. Quarto, illustrated wrappers, pp. xi, 44, illustrated. “Describes two Arnhem Land sites containing pictorial stone arrangements (map shows locations in Arnhem Bay & Dalywoi Bay), 1) Wurrawurrawoi site, gives map reference for series R502, sheet SD53-4, topography, territory of Lamomirri & Galbu clans
Ref: 1000
Aboriginal artview full entry
Reference: see Aboriginal stone pictures in eastern Arnhem Land, by MACKNIGHT, C. C.; GRAY, W. J.

Publishing details: Canberra : Australian Institute of Aboriginal Studies, 1970. Quarto, illustrated wrappers, pp. xi, 44, illustrated. “Describes two Arnhem Land sites containing pictorial stone arrangements (map shows locations in Arnhem Bay & Dalywoi Bay), 1) Wurrawurrawoi site, gives map reference for series R502, sheet SD53-4, topography, territory of Lamomirri & Galbu clans
Boyd Robinview full entry
Reference: Robin Boyd : a life, by Geoffrey Searle
Publishing details: Melbourne : Melbourne University Press, 1996. First paperback edition. Octabo, wrappers in dustjacket (small tear to head of spine), pp. [xii]; 368, illustrated. Printed in an edition of 2000 copies.
Ref: 1000
McNicol Roderick view full entry
Reference: Roderick McNicol - The existential portrait. “Rod McNicol’s photographic practice has always concentrated on portraiture as a genre that highlights mortality. For over three decades McNicol has been inviting people from his inner-city community to put their lives on pause for a few moments and stare into the lens of his camera. The portraits that McNicol has captured in the stillness of his studio are both tender and brazen; they are faces that function as witnesses to the inescapable passing of time. This exhibition will survey McNicol’s extended portrait project, from his early black-and-white prints through to his most recent colour portraits.” – MGA website.
Publishing details: Melbourne : Monash Gallery of Art, 2014. Quarto, illustrated wrappers, pp. 40, photographic portraits.



Ref: 1000
Bell Catherineview full entry
Reference: Street strollers of New York. ‘Street strollers of New York is a sequence of photographs that document African-American nannies shuttling white children through the affluent mid-town streets of Manhattan. Catherine Bell’s interest in this subject grew out of her own experience working as a nanny in London; she embarked on this project with the notion to pay tribute to an under-acknowledged workforce. While there is a significant tradition in documentary photography of images of heroic workers, Bell’s images of African-American nannies belong to another tradition altogether – that of the clandestine street photograph. In these pictures, taken with a hidden camera and for the most part without the subject’s knowledge, Bell has cast each nanny in the role of a fugitive.’ – Stephen Zagala, curator.
Published to coincide with the exhibition: New photography from the footpath / Catherine Bell, Glenn Sloggett, Ian Tippett. Monash Gallery of Art 3 April – 8 June 2014. [A scarce Australian photobook].
Publishing details: Melbourne : Monash Gallery of Art, 2014. Duodecimo, illustrated wrappers, unpaginated, photobook.
Two copies recorded on Trove (UQ, Monash) with another in the ACU.


Ref: 1000
Dale Pamelaview full entry
Reference: White Tiger in the Magic Garden, by Pamela Dale. Illustrated. Includes biography.


Publishing details: Paper Stone Scissors, 2004, pb, copy inscribed by artist.
Dale Pamelaview full entry
Reference: Nature swims with life in Dale's walk-in paradise. From The Age, December 4, 2004:

A decade divided between Australia and Europe has nurtured Pamela Dale's appreciation for life's more beautiful moments.

From the south of France to Victoria's Mornington Peninsula, she has sat, painted and absorbed her surrounds. In her current series of large, intricate oil paintings, created over two years, Dale has opened windows to a paradise in which barn owls sit surrounded by blooming sunflowers; where rosellas and cockatiels nuzzle each other on the branches of backyard trees. Her detailed depictions of wildlife and lush landscapes would verge on the photo-realistic were it not for their deliberately constructed nature.
"These works aren't actually located in any one culture and so I'm going after the universal," Dale says. "I think one of my jobs as an artist is to shine the light back on beauty, whether it be natural beauty or something else. Because, in fact, these are highly artificial."

At 42, Dale's exposure to the European way of life has rubbed off on her. Her city studio is sparse, clean and neat. Her workbench has a single chair behind it and underneath her provincial wash-basin hangs a gingham curtain.

Awarded the Keith and Elisabeth Murdoch Travelling Fellowship in 1993, she went to Europe, mainly France and Holland, where she was known for her printmaking and works on paper before her painting skills came to the fore. Despite 10 years of living intermittently overseas, Dale enjoys working in Australia. She grew up in Melbourne, her birthplace, and country Victoria. The city made its impact on Dale but her eight years in the country wielded the greatest influence. "We had incredible freedom to roam and explore and, of course, we had plenty of animals."

Although Europe has some of the world's most famous greenery, Dale says it was two rooms painted to look like gardens in Paris' Musee de Cluny that brought her more joy than anything else she saw in her time on the continent.
"When I went in to those two rooms they made a huge impression on me, it was just like that flood of joy," she says.
"In the middle of this huge city in Europe you go into these rooms and there's this transformation, just because of an idea. I think that when you're overseas you do feel disconnected from nature, whereas in Australia you're still very connected all of the time. In a way there's a response to that (in my work)."

Dale says her paintings, executed in blue, are "lived" pieces. Stretching canvas across her studio wall, Dale paints directly on to them. No sketching, no outlines, just paint as she places it. It's a process that Dale describes as very different from her previous work, though no less time consuming.
"These take more than a month to create, so you've actually got to live in that space while you're creating. They're 'lived' in the sense that, imaginatively, I can go anywhere in the world on this canvas."

Her process allows for exploration and innovation but little room for error. Dale embraces these "happy accidents".
"They're incorporated," she says. "I'm not kidding you, you really are fully in the zone when you're making them. Some days are quicker, some days slower, but as I said, you live it. In a way, they direct themselves and there's very little separation between you and what you're doing at that time."
The detail of the paintings - plumage around a bird's eye or pollen on a flower - are reminiscent of some of Dale's prints, although the artist says the scale of the works are what sets them apart.

"Generally I'm trying to get a feel of the walk-in paradise, so to speak. Because these are large scale, you actually walk into them in a sense. You can get sucked into one of the flowers, but when you're creating them it is like an organic development of shape upon shape and it also has echoes of how nature creates itself, the replication."
Although some works have backgrounds of yellow or rose, the fine blue paint Dale works with also evokes the intricate detail of a delft tile. Her representations are often so faithful, there is a sense the leaves in the painted scene might slowly unfurl and the birds will flap their wings and fly away. Even though the image is still, it's as though the movement and life of the scene have been held for a moment, not captured. The word "paradise" gets bandied around a lot and Dale says her work strives to discover it.

"I think it's really worthy to look for paradise in the nooks and crevices of our contemporary life," she says. "We don't have much connection with mythical places or we're trying to hold on to what little we've got, so in a way there's a response to that, in a way they're the opposite to hard-edged consumerism."
White Tiger and the Magic Garden is at Spacement Gallery until December 11.


Another Colonial Boyview full entry
Reference: see Another Colonial Boy by Marc Clark, Numerous b&w and colour illustrations and photographs throughout. Autobiography. Includes appendices, about the author, bibliography, plus various works. Includes some short chapters on other artists. From rear cover (in part): "Marc Clark came to Australia from England in 1962, responded happily to an Australian way of life and has lived and worked in Melbourne ever since. Marc Clark is widely acknowledged to be a very accomplished and versatile sculptor who has created with equal assurance a succession of commissioned memorial works on a monumental scale and a large number of other sculptures more personally conceived and motivated by his own powers of observation and invention".
Publishing details: CopyRight Publishing Company, Brisbane, 2005, 176pp, pb.
Last Clifford p157-8view full entry
Reference: see Another Colonial Boy by Marc Clark, Numerous b&w and colour illustrations and photographs throughout. Autobiography. Includes appendices, about the author, bibliography, plus various works. Includes some short chapters on other artists. From rear cover (in part): "Marc Clark came to Australia from England in 1962, responded happily to an Australian way of life and has lived and worked in Melbourne ever since. Marc Clark is widely acknowledged to be a very accomplished and versatile sculptor who has created with equal assurance a succession of commissioned memorial works on a monumental scale and a large number of other sculptures more personally conceived and motivated by his own powers of observation and invention".
Publishing details: CopyRight Publishing Company, Brisbane, 2005, 176pp, pb.
Kane Julius p157-8view full entry
Reference: see Another Colonial Boy by Marc Clark, Numerous b&w and colour illustrations and photographs throughout. Autobiography. Includes appendices, about the author, bibliography, plus various works. Includes some short chapters on other artists. From rear cover (in part): "Marc Clark came to Australia from England in 1962, responded happily to an Australian way of life and has lived and worked in Melbourne ever since. Marc Clark is widely acknowledged to be a very accomplished and versatile sculptor who has created with equal assurance a succession of commissioned memorial works on a monumental scale and a large number of other sculptures more personally conceived and motivated by his own powers of observation and invention".
Publishing details: CopyRight Publishing Company, Brisbane, 2005, 176pp, pb.
May Stephen p159view full entry
Reference: see Another Colonial Boy by Marc Clark, Numerous b&w and colour illustrations and photographs throughout. Autobiography. Includes appendices, about the author, bibliography, plus various works. Includes some short chapters on other artists. From rear cover (in part): "Marc Clark came to Australia from England in 1962, responded happily to an Australian way of life and has lived and worked in Melbourne ever since. Marc Clark is widely acknowledged to be a very accomplished and versatile sculptor who has created with equal assurance a succession of commissioned memorial works on a monumental scale and a large number of other sculptures more personally conceived and motivated by his own powers of observation and invention".
Publishing details: CopyRight Publishing Company, Brisbane, 2005, 176pp, pb.
Nikoleski Vlase p160view full entry
Reference: see Another Colonial Boy by Marc Clark, Numerous b&w and colour illustrations and photographs throughout. Autobiography. Includes appendices, about the author, bibliography, plus various works. Includes some short chapters on other artists. From rear cover (in part): "Marc Clark came to Australia from England in 1962, responded happily to an Australian way of life and has lived and worked in Melbourne ever since. Marc Clark is widely acknowledged to be a very accomplished and versatile sculptor who has created with equal assurance a succession of commissioned memorial works on a monumental scale and a large number of other sculptures more personally conceived and motivated by his own powers of observation and invention".
Publishing details: CopyRight Publishing Company, Brisbane, 2005, 176pp, pb.
Mauriks Adrian p161view full entry
Reference: see Another Colonial Boy by Marc Clark, Numerous b&w and colour illustrations and photographs throughout. Autobiography. Includes appendices, about the author, bibliography, plus various works. Includes some short chapters on other artists. From rear cover (in part): "Marc Clark came to Australia from England in 1962, responded happily to an Australian way of life and has lived and worked in Melbourne ever since. Marc Clark is widely acknowledged to be a very accomplished and versatile sculptor who has created with equal assurance a succession of commissioned memorial works on a monumental scale and a large number of other sculptures more personally conceived and motivated by his own powers of observation and invention".
Publishing details: CopyRight Publishing Company, Brisbane, 2005, 176pp, pb.
Hood Kenneth p162view full entry
Reference: see Another Colonial Boy by Marc Clark, Numerous b&w and colour illustrations and photographs throughout. Autobiography. Includes appendices, about the author, bibliography, plus various works. Includes some short chapters on other artists. From rear cover (in part): "Marc Clark came to Australia from England in 1962, responded happily to an Australian way of life and has lived and worked in Melbourne ever since. Marc Clark is widely acknowledged to be a very accomplished and versatile sculptor who has created with equal assurance a succession of commissioned memorial works on a monumental scale and a large number of other sculptures more personally conceived and motivated by his own powers of observation and invention".
Publishing details: CopyRight Publishing Company, Brisbane, 2005, 176pp, pb.
Rees Lloyd p163-5view full entry
Reference: see Another Colonial Boy by Marc Clark, Numerous b&w and colour illustrations and photographs throughout. Autobiography. Includes appendices, about the author, bibliography, plus various works. Includes some short chapters on other artists. From rear cover (in part): "Marc Clark came to Australia from England in 1962, responded happily to an Australian way of life and has lived and worked in Melbourne ever since. Marc Clark is widely acknowledged to be a very accomplished and versatile sculptor who has created with equal assurance a succession of commissioned memorial works on a monumental scale and a large number of other sculptures more personally conceived and motivated by his own powers of observation and invention".
Publishing details: CopyRight Publishing Company, Brisbane, 2005, 176pp, pb.
Leti Bruno p166view full entry
Reference: see Another Colonial Boy by Marc Clark, Numerous b&w and colour illustrations and photographs throughout. Autobiography. Includes appendices, about the author, bibliography, plus various works. Includes some short chapters on other artists. From rear cover (in part): "Marc Clark came to Australia from England in 1962, responded happily to an Australian way of life and has lived and worked in Melbourne ever since. Marc Clark is widely acknowledged to be a very accomplished and versatile sculptor who has created with equal assurance a succession of commissioned memorial works on a monumental scale and a large number of other sculptures more personally conceived and motivated by his own powers of observation and invention".
Publishing details: CopyRight Publishing Company, Brisbane, 2005, 176pp, pb.
Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004view full entry
Reference: The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
Bock Thomasview full entry
Reference: see The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
Boyes G T W B 1786-1853view full entry
Reference: see The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
Chapman Thomas Evans 1789-1864view full entry
Reference: see The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
Meredith Louisa Ann 1842-1895view full entry
Reference: see The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
Nixon Anna Maria early 1800s-1868view full entry
Reference: see The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
Piguenit William Charles 1836-1914view full entry
Reference: see The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
Prout John Skinner 1805-1876view full entry
Reference: see The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
de Wesselow Francis Guillemard 1819-1906view full entry
Reference: see The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
Stanley Owen 1811-1850view full entry
Reference: see The Royal Society of Tasmania Calendar 2004. Includes 13 illustrations and brief biographies of 9 Tasmanian colonial artists.
Publishing details: The Royal Society of Tasmania, 2004, pb, 28pp
Top arts VCE National Gallery of Victoriaview full entry
Reference: Top arts, Victoria College of the Arts, National Gallery of Victoria. An annual publication of students’ work. All to be indexed. For example the 2002 edition has approximately 100 art students listed each with an artist statement and an example of their work.
Publishing details: Melbourne : National Gallery of Victoria, c2000-2013, v. : col. ill.
Ref: 1000
National Gallery Schoolview full entry
Reference: see Top arts, Victoria College of the Arts, National Gallery of Victoria. An annual publication of students’ work. All to be indexed.
Publishing details: Melbourne : National Gallery of Victoria, c2000-2013, v. : col. ill.
Victoria College of the Artsview full entry
Reference: see Top arts, Victoria College of the Arts, National Gallery of Victoria. An annual publication of students’ work. All to be indexed.
Publishing details: Melbourne : National Gallery of Victoria, c2000-2013, v. : col. ill.
Recent past - writing Australian artview full entry
Reference: Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Thomas Danielview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Walker Robert photographerview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Annandale Imitation Realistsview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Lanceley Colinview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Brown Mikeview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Crothall Rossview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Hinder Frankview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Williams Fredview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Fairweather Ianview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Dawson Janetview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Streeton Arthurview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Watkins Dickview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Balson Ralphview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Crowley Graceview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Brack Johnview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Larter Richardview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Smith Grace Cossingtonview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
von Guerard Eugeneview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Klippel Robertview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Strachan Davidview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Holmes Edithview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Sharp Martinview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Aboriginal artview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Hawkins Weaverview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Swanton Lucyview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Parr Mikeview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Tillers Imantsview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Unsworth Kenview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Christo in Australiaview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Bonython Kimview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Kerr Joan Dictionaryview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Best Marionview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
de Berg Hazelview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Hirschfeld-Mack Ludwigview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
McCullough Tomview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Missingham Halview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Draffin Nicholasview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Taylor Howardview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Andersons Andrewview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Madock Beaview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
colonial art the idea ofview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Boyd Arthurview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Seidler Harry and Penelopeview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Tuckson Tonyview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Smith Bernard as writerview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
McNicoll Ruthview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Glover Johnview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Durrant Ivanview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Gascoigne Rosalieview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Burns Timview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Horton Mervynview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Lade Owen view full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Lambert Georgeview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Teague Violetview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Ramsay Hughview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Nolan Sidneyview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Meadmore Clementview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Mona Gallery Hobartview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Roberts Tomview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Black Dorritview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
MacPherson Robertview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Rooney Robertview full entry
Reference: see Recent past: writing Australian art, by Daniel Thomas; edited by Hannah Fink and Stephen Miller. ‘Covering the period from 1958 to 2020, Recent past: writing Australian art is the first anthology of Thomas's writings and presents an overview of Australian art, at once authoritative and idiosyncratic, bringing alive both old and new art.’ Includes bibliographical references (pages 339-348) and index. [The subjects of the main essays have been included in the Scheding Index. Other artists yet to be indexed]
Publishing details: Art Gallery of New South Wales, 2020, hc, 348pp, colour illustrations
Still Lifeview full entry
Reference: Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Baird Johnview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Barnett Elizabethview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Bergin Kateview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Biviano Fabrizioview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Bokor Johnview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Campbell Cressidaview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Carment Tomview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Cotton Fionaview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Culliton Lucyview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Dalton Jonathanview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Cuthleben Janeview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Hannaford Tseringview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Hattam Katherineview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Home Deanview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Honeywill Johnview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Huelin Andreaview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Kerwick Jordyview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Leighton-Dore Bronteview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Malherbe Robertview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Mark Indiaview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Mason Kiataview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
McCall Staceyview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
McDonald Angusview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Meagher Julianview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Michell Matildaview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Miller Lewisview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Milne Rachelview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Minnici Petaview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Moore Davidview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Nguyen Anhview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Placidi Annaview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Preisz Jamieview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Rae Judeview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Roleff Lucyview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Simpson Peterview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Tannock Jane-Francesview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Vugich Melanieview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Waanders Kateview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Whale Mirra Mirraview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Young Zoeview full entry
Reference: see Still Life - contemporary Australian painters, by Amber Creswell Bell. Includes essays on each of the artists included and examples of their work. [’A collection of objects, no matter how mundane, tells a story. They are like a little world; you can get lost in them.' - John Bokor Still Life explores the diverse practices of more than forty contemporary Australian artists and documents a repertoire of styles, subjects, visions and philosophies. Alongside flowers and food - mainstays of the genre - the works within these pages also incorporate objects such as books and beer cans, birds and balloons, adding energy and intrigue to both the composition and the story revealed. This book captures the inanimate beauty of the everyday in a distinctly Australian context, and offers a meditation on human experience and the brevity of life.’]
Publishing details: Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
271 pages, hc, colour illustrations, portraits
Pastel Artistsview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Paleg Graceview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Diefenbach Lynview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Duff Leoniview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Lelek Agataview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Mellady Lynview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Bowden Jonathanview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Paterson Rossview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Hayes Janetview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Smith Kateview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Adams Katkaview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Edwards Helenview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Beasley-Southgate Barbaraview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Morvell Steveview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Simmonds Brianview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Todman-Parrant Rosemaryview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Hamilton Catherineview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Hugill Yvetteview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Hemmert Rolandview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Macleod Anthonyview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
McLean Amandaview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Wirt Libbyview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Sharp Raeleneview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Wilkinson Terryview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Murray Terrianneview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Scuffins Martinview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Truslove Billview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Dayman Lyleview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Seberry Jo-Anneview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Gilbert-Ng Penelopeview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Clark Alisonview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Corke Louiseview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Jeffrey Ivyview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Szalay Rachelview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Clark Nolaview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Silvester Julieview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Hona Reginaview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Hargraves Cynthiaview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Clark Alisonview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Miller Petaview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Attard Josephview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Caddy Peterview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Grant Colinview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
McManus Barbaraview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Ferguson Petraiview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Reust Triciaview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Fisher Shirleyview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Dare Sandraview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Blake Chrisview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Atkins Christineview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Thiesfeld Johnview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
Hayes Janetview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
pastel societies in Australia listed inview full entry
Reference: see Luminous Colour - Showcasing Australian Pastel Artists by Linda Hibbs
‘The first book ever printed which focuses entirely on Australian pastel Artists.’ Featuring 50 contemporary pastel painters with artists’ statements and illustrations of their work.
Publishing details: Ringwood East, Victoria : Indah Creations & Publications, 2014,
220 pages, colour illustrations
She-oak and sunlightview full entry
Reference: She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
impressionismview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Abrahams Louis 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Ashton Julian1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Barak William 5 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Barnett H Walter 3 photographsview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Bayliss Charles 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Boake Barcroft Capel 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Buvelot Louis 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Caire Nicholas 3 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Casas Ramon portrait of Tom Robertsview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Carrick Ethel 4 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Catani Ugo 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Conder Charles 36 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Davies David 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Fox E Phillips 11 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Fuller Florence 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Fullwood A Henry 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Gregory Ina 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Holterman Otto Bernard 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Joel Grace 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Lambert George 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Lindt J W 3 photographsview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Longstaff John 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Loureiro Artur 3 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Mahony Elizabeth 1 photograph of Tom Robertsview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Mather John 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
McCubbin Frederick 12 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Menpes Mortimer 5 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Meyer Mary 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Moffitt Ernest 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Mills Alice 1 photograph of Tom Roberts and 1 of Streetonview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Moore May 1 photographview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Nerli Girolamo 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Nettleton Charles 2 photographsview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Pole Leon 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Price Jane 4 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Rae Iso 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Roberts Tom 58 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Russell John 10 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Sommers John Snr 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Southern Clara 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Sutherland George 1 workview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Streeton Arthur 45 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Teague Violet 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Tucker Tudor St George 3 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Vale May 6 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Williamson Elizabeth 3 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Withers Walter 2 worksview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Wood Francis Derwent 1 sculptureview full entry
Reference: see She-oak and sunlight - Australian impressionism / Anne Gray and Angela Hesson (editors) and contributors ; [foreword by] Tony Ellwood. Catalogue for exhibition held at NGV Melbourne on 2 April to 22 August 2021.Includes bibliographical references (267-273). No index, some biographical information within text.
Chapters:
• Friends and rivals: a quartet with variations / Anne Grey
• Australian impressionists: critical reception and patronage / Ann Galbally
• Australian impressionism: a longer history / Sophie Gerherd and Hannah Presley
• Australian impressionism: a chronology / Sophie Gerherd
• Ephemeral magic: symbolism, poetry and the taste for transformation / Angela Hesson
• Australian impressionism and photography / Helen Ennis
• Music and Australian impressionism / Elizabeth Kertesz
• When is impressionism not impressionism? The case of Australian art at the turn of the nineteenth century / MaryAnne Stevens
• Notes
• List of works
Publishing details: National Gallery of Victoria in association with Thames & Hudson Australia, 2021,
xii, 289 pages : chiefly colour illustrations, portraits (some colour)
Ewing and George Paton Galleriesview full entry
Reference: see Remembering the Ewing and George Paton Galleries by Charmaine Ching, in University of Melbourne Collections, issue 14, June 2014.
Publishing details: University of Melbourne Collections, issue 14, June 2014.
Contemporary artview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Allen Mickyview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Althoff Ernieview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index.
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Annear Judyview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Arkley Howardview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Badger Meredithview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Barrie Rayview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Bell Catherineview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Bell Margaretview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Binns Vivienneview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Bionski Annetteview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Bram Stephenview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Brassington Patview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Brennan Angelaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Brophy Philipview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Brown-Rrap Julieview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Rrap-Brown Julieview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Bubbles Cooperativeview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Bufardeci Louiseview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Burchill Janetview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Burke Janineview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Burns Timview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Callas Peterview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Cantrill Arthur and Corinneview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Clark Tonyview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Clutterbuck Jockview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Cole Peter Dview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Cole Peter view full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Colquhoun Brettview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Cook Lynneview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Coventry Virginiaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Cripps Peterview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Cullen Philippaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Danko Aleksview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Davies Isobelview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Davies Suzanneview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Davila Juanview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Davis Graemeview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Davis Johnview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Daylesford Community Artistsview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
De Clario Domenicoview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Dumbrell Lesleyview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Earthworks Poster Collectiveview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Edquist Harrietview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Ely Bonitaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Engberg Julianaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Paton George Galleryview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
George Paton Galleryview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Fogarty Annview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Ford Sueview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Foss Paulview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Gower Elizabethview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Grounds Joanview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Grounds Marrview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Hansen Brieleview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Heartfield Johnview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Hershman Lynnview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Hughes Johnview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Hunter Robertview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Hutchinson Noelview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Johns-Messenger Natashaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Johnson Mitchview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Jones Lyndalview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Jones Stephenview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Kane Juliusview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Keele-Bedford Deniseview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Kelly Maryview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Kennedy Peterview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Kent Janeview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Koop Stuartview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Kozic Mariaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Kruger Barbaraview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Laughinghandsview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Laverack Louiseview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Lethbridge Johnview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Longmore Patview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Lowe Geoffview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Lucas Noeleneview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
McDonald Fionaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
McDonald Anneview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Macinolty Chipsview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Mann Chrisview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Marrinon Lindaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Marsh Anneview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
McCaughey Patrickview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
McCulloch Tomview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
McGilchrist Ericaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
McPhee Doraview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Mereweather Charlesview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Meyer Olafview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Mortensen Kevinview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Murphy Berniceview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Murray-White Cliveview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Nagorka Ronview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Newmarch Annview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Nicholson Tomview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Nikoleski Vlaseview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Nixon Johnview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Nolan Roseview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
O’Halloran Davidview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
O’Connor Ailsa 2 refsview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Orr Jillview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Parkhill Leighview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Parr Mikeview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Parry Ianview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Performance artview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Pinacotheca Galleryview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Pollard Bruceview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Randall Robert Randelliview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Randelli - Randall Robert view full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Richard Nellyview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Roberts Lisaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Robertson Toniview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Robertson Deniseview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Rogers Meredithview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Rooney Robertview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Rosler Marthaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Rubbo Kiffyview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Rumley Katrinaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Saul Shiraleeview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Schoenbaum Samview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Schutze Paulview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Shark le Witt Vivienneview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
le Witt Vivienne Shark see also Shark le Wittview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Shepherd Saulview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Smith Terryview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Stack Judyview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Stelarcview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Stephen Annview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Stephenson Janeview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Stokes Christineview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Taylor Paulview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Tillers Imantsview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
To Hiramview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Traviato Ralphview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Tsk Tsk Tskview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Tyndall Mariaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Tyndall Peterview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Walker Kateview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Watson Jennyview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Wee Cavanview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Weis Bobview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Wicks Arthurview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Wilson Davidview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Wright Claudiaview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Women’s artview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Zahalka Anneview full entry
Reference: When you think about art : the Ewing and George Paton Galleries, 1971-2008, edited by Helen Vivian. Includes bibliographical references (pages 235-236) and index. [Artists with works illustrated or who have multiple references have been included in the Scheding Index].
[’Editor: Helen Vivian, Editor; with authors: Judy Annear, Dr Carolyn Barnes, Swinburne University, Sandra Bridie, Dr Janine Burke, Suzanne Davies, Juliana Engberg, Susan Hewitt, Dr Anne Marsh, Matthew Perkins and Elena Galimberti, Denise Robinson, Meredith Rogers, Vivienne Shark Lewitt, and Peter Tyndall.
This richly illustrated history provides an account of one of the most spirited art spaces in Melbourne. As Australia’s first publicly funded avant-garde space, the Ewing and George Paton Gallery was in a unique position. From the early 1970s it has fostered experimentation, encouraged new media and provided a forum for ideas and innovation.
The book details exhibitions and events which influenced the development of the visual arts in Australia. It examines the dramatic changes which took place from the experimentation of the seventies to the impact of Postmodernism in the eighties, through to the greater integration of these disparate forces today. This was a pivotal period in Australian contemporary art.
Over the decades the Gallery has exhibited Australia’s most acclaimed contemporary artists. Rare images of their work, along with early video art, have been recovered from the gallery archive and are reproduced in the book.
The Gallery’s impact extended far beyond its walls. It published widely including the important journals Art Almanac (1974 – 1982 and is continuing privately today), Arts Melbourne (1976-1977), and Agenda Contemporary Art (1988-1990). The Gallery was also a key centre for ideas. It ran an extensive seminar program featuring national and international luminaries, including: Jean Baudrillard, Germano Celant, Umberto Eco, Geeta Kapur, Mary Kelly, Lucy Lippard, Mario Merz, Marina Abramovic, Meaghan Morris, Gayatri Spivak, Bill Viola and many, many more.’]
Publishing details: Macmillan Art, 2008, 240 pages : illustrations (some colour), facsimiles (some colour), portraits (some colour)
Josephine Ghilchik 1890-1981view full entry
Reference: see Chiswick Auctions, May 13, 2021, UK, lot 487: JOSEPHINE GHILCHIK (BRITISH/AUSTRALIAN 1890-1981) An English Village in Summer signed Josephine Ghilchik (lower right) oil on canvas 64 x 45.5 cm together with JOSEPHINE GHILCHIK The Ruins signed Josephine Ghilchik (lower right) oil on canvas 27 x 37.5 cm JOSEPHINE GHILCHIK The Dressing Table signed Josphine Gilchik (lower left) oil on canvas 38.4 x 58.7 cm (3)
Dearling Florence 1895-1988view full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd
May 30, 2021, lot Lot 950: FLORENCE DEARLING (1895-1988) (attributed) Self portrait oil on canvas blackwood frame.
FLORENCE DEARLING (1895-1988) (attributed)
Self portrait
oil on canvas
blackwood frame
Note: Dearling trained under George Bell in Melbourne
80 x 55cm
Wilson W Jview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd
May 30, 2021, Lot 971: W.J. WILSON (Australian school, 19th century), maritime scene, oil and gouache on board, signed lower left "WJW 1880", remains of artist label verso, ​24 x 34cm.
W.J. WILSON (Australian school, 19th century),
maritime scene,
oil and gouache on board,
signed lower left "WJW 1880",
remains of artist label verso,
24 x 34cm
Francis May and Alice Hobsonview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd
May 30, 2021, lot 998, MAY FRANCIS & ALICE HOBSON (19th century, Australian),
miniature portrait of William Stephen Hobson,
inscribed verso "William Stephen Hobson, began by May Francis, finished by Alice Hobson his daughter",
11 x 10cm overall
Hobson Alice and May Francis view full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd
May 30, 2021, lot 998, MAY FRANCIS & ALICE HOBSON (19th century, Australian),
miniature portrait of William Stephen Hobson,
inscribed verso "William Stephen Hobson, began by May Francis, finished by Alice Hobson his daughter",
11 x 10cm overall
May Edgar Charlesview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 999, EDGAR CHARLES MAY & GEORGE HAMILTON,
The Lost Bushman,
lithograph; signed by May and initialled by Hamilton plate,
titled lower right, circa 1890,
15 x 21cm.
Hamilton Georgeview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 999, EDGAR CHARLES MAY & GEORGE HAMILTON,
The Lost Bushman,
lithograph; signed by May and initialled by Hamilton plate,
titled lower right, circa 1890,
15 x 21cm.
Doyle Nview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 1003: N. DOYLE, (Australian, 19th century), The Britannia, watercolour, signed lower right "N.D." and "Doyle" in the flag, 27 x 48cm
Clark Rolandview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 1012: ROLAND CLARK (Active 1890s - 1900s)
"North East of Melbourne, on Yarra near Warrandyte'',
watercolour, titled verso,
signed and dated "R.Clark '94" lower left,
28.5 x 48.5cm.
Besides the gold mine, the foreground of the picture shows extensive timber cutting and stacking next to the saw mill on the bank of the river.
Lydford A Lview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 1021: A.L. LYDFORD (Australia),
kookaburra with mouse,
oil on board,
signed lower right "A.L. Lydford, 1943",
in oval frame,
42 x 27cm


Bellingham Bettyview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 1025: BETTY BELLINGHAM (Australian), Melbourne skyline, early 20th century, oil on canvas, signed lower right "B. Bellingham", ​25 x 45cm
Dundas Thelmaview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 1033: D.R. DUNDAS & THELMA DUNDAS,
"Love Lyrics" & "His First Love",
small watercolours, dated 15/4/1915,
(appear to be artwork for postcards),
framed together, overall 24 x 35cm.
Dundas D Rview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 1033: D.R. DUNDAS & THELMA DUNDAS,
"Love Lyrics" & "His First Love",
small watercolours, dated 15/4/1915,
(appear to be artwork for postcards),
framed together, overall 24 x 35cm.
Malcolm Iview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 1048: I. MALCOLM,
Terryll West Salt Works, Feb.1920,
oil on board,
signed at lower left (partly obscured by frame),
titled and dated verso,
30 x 87cm.
Lake Tyrrell is a shallow, salt-crusted depression in the Mallee district of north-west Victoria. The name is derived from the local Wergaia word for 'sky', the Boorong Aboriginal people of the area being distinguished for their interest in star-lore. During dry periods, people can walk on to the lake area by using places where salt has formed a solid surface. Salt was first harvested from Sea Lake in 1896. By 1900 Lascelles company was turning a profit but this was destroyed by droughts and pests. In 1963-64 Cheetham Salt took up a number of leases on Lake Tyrrell.
Bullen Leonard Aview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, lot 1069: LEONARD A. BULLEN (active 1930s-40s),
Group of (3) photo-lithographs, each titled and signed in the lower margin:
On the Steps of Parliament House, Melbourne,
Through an Arch of the Town Hall, Melbourne,
Station Tower, Melbourne,
the first 2 initialled in the plate; the last fully signed.
Various sizes.
Harrison Harold Wright 1897-1964view full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021,
Lot 1082: HAROLD WRIGHT HARRISON (1897-1964), Florence Harrison (wife of the artist), oil on board, signed lower right "H. Wright Harrison", ​60 x 50cm
Baldwin Helen b1912view full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021,
Lot 1123: HELEN BALDWIN (1912 - ?)
Gumnuts in her hair - Young woman (Lizzie) from Docker River,
watercolour on board,
signed lower right,
33 x 29cm.
With numbered exhibition label verso.
Baldwin's love of the Australian countryside led her to portray Aboriginal people and their way of life in her artwork. She travelled extensively along the western rivers, including the Barwon, the Namoi and others, and travelled extensively through Central Australia.
Arnold Georgeview full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, Lot 1124: GEORGE ARNOLD (working 1940s - 60s), Collins Street, [Melbourne] Evening, watercolour on board, ​signed and dated "George Arnold '60" lower right, 33 x 48cm.
Dollery John b1933?view full entry
Reference: see Leski Auctions Pty Ltd., May 30, 2021, Lot 1142: JOHN DOLLERY (1933 - ) (The billy on the campfire), oil on canvas, signed and dated "1967" lower right, 50 x 75cm.
Select Language ▼
Lot 1145: JOHN DOLLERY (1933 - ) (A waterfall), oil on board, signed lower left,
Lot 1143: JOHN DOLLERY (1933 - ) (The Waterwheel), oil on board, signed lower left, 50 x 40cm.
Maroney Ross view full entry
Reference: An historian's sketchbook of Orange / by Ross Maroney
Publishing details: Orange City Council, c2003 
i, 79 p. : chiefly ill.
Ref: 1000
Vincent Helenview full entry
Reference: MOSLEY, Helen. FOLLOW THE FLUTE. Illustrated by Helen Vincent.
Publishing details: Melb. Georgian House. 1948. Or.Col.Ill.wrapps. Dustjacket. unpag. Many colour illustrations. 1st ed. Muir 5197.
Ref: 1000
Towers Winifred Maryview full entry
Reference: PHILP, Ruth. THE HAPPY THREE. Illustrations by Winifred M. Towers.
Publishing details: Stanthorpe, QLD. Samuel
Lee. 1961. (2nd ed) 4to. Col.ill.bds. 44pp. Some col & many b/w ills. Muir 5965.
Ref: 1000
Melrose Genevieveview full entry
Reference: SCRIVEN, Peter. THE TINTOOKIES AND LITTLE FELLA BINDI. Illustrated by Genevieve Melrose. Adapted from the Marionette Theatre of Australia's Little Fella Bindi.

Publishing details: Melb. Lansdowne Press. 1966. 4to. Or.bds. Dustjacket. 28pp. Many Col. ills. Dj. 1st ed. Muir 6642.
Ref: 1000
Mendoza June view full entry
Reference: SPAULL, George. POOK-A-NOO. Pictures by June Mendoza.
Publishing details: Syd. W.E. Smith. n.d. (1948) 4to. Or.qt.cl. & dec.bds. (sl.rubbed) 106pp. b/w ills. & 2 Col.plates. 1st ed. Muir 6991.
Ref: 1000


First | Previous | Record 107051 – 108050 of 158397 | Next | Last